Accton Technology OAP2611A 802.11b/g Outdoor Access Point User Manual WI2

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	758212
Application ID	Q9g1g7Hz4ZBZ0xJF/Qmp3g==
Document Description	Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	208.28kB (2603522 bits)
Date Submitted	2007-02-13 00:00:00
Date Available	2007-02-13 00:00:00
Creation Date	2007-02-13 10:47:23
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2007-02-13 14:33:23
Document Title	WI2.book
Document Creator	FrameMaker 7.0
Document Author:	david

BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS
Wi²
System Manual
TE1143
February 2007
P/N
Document History
Document History
Topic
This is the document’s first Release
ii
Description
Date Issued
December 2006
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Legal Rights
Legal Rights
© Copyright 2006 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and
owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be made
to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication
shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically
incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
Trade Names
Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®,
BreezeMANAGE™, BreezeLINK®, BreezeConfig™, BreezeMAX™, AlvariSTAR™,
BreezeLITE™, MGW™, eMGW™, WAVEXpress™, MicroXpress™, WAVEXchange™,
WAVEView™, GSM Network in a Box and TurboWAVE™ and/or other products
and/or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks
or service marks of Alvarion Ltd.
All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of
this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranties and Disclaimers
All Alvarion Ltd. ("Alvarion") products purchased from Alvarion or through any of
Alvarion's authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product
liability terms and conditions.
Exclusive Warranty
(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible
media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will
be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser
(the "Warranty Period"). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser's sole
remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion'
standard R&R procedure.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
iii
Legal Rights
(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality
according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month from
invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion may
release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional performance
improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the "Warranty"). Bug fixes,
temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates.
Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be
purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two (2)
most recent Software major releases.
ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING
AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT
DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER'S OR ANY THIRD
PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER
TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE
BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE,
LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.
Disclaimer
(a) THE SUPPLIED UNITS SUPPORT 802.11 b/g ONLY.
(b) The Software is sold on an "AS IS" basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors
MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTATION. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE.
UNITS OF PRODUCT (INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO
PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND ARE NOT
DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN
APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE, MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF
PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE
PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ("HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES"). HIGH
RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, USE AS PART OF
ON-LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING
FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR
FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR
TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR
OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL
HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
iv
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Legal Rights
(c) PURCHASER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS
WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE
PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION'S OPTION. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY
OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND
ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. ALVARION' WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER,
AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER
ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY
OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION,
MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.
Limitation of Liability
(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF
BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER
BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR
OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES
OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY
PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL
PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID
FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF
A PARTY'S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Legal Rights
Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding
Ensure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly
installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure
that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in
accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even
where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national
codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna
mast are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to
provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event,
Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated
with or caused by installation, grounding or lightning protection.
Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste
Disposal of Electronic and Electrical Waste
Pursuant to the WEEE EU Directive electronic and electrical waste must not be disposed of with
unsorted waste. Please contact your local recycling authority for disposal of this product.
vi
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Legal Rights
Important Notice
This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
„ This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such
information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized
users of the respective Alvarion products.
„ No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any
person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical,
without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
„ The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only.
The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without
notice.
„ The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The
software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
license.
„ Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
„ Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are
fictitious unless otherwise noted.
„ Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and
descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this
publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless
specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
„ The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not
constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.
„ Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the
equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment
warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is
manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be
installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such
manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
vii
Legal Rights
the manufacturers. Non-compliance with such instructions may result in serious
damage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user's authority to operate the
equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer.
viii
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Compliances
Compliances
Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
„ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
„ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
„ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected
„ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE: FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with
a minimum distance of 20 centimeters (8 inches) between the radiator and your
body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
EC Conformance Declaration
Hereby, Alvarion, declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of the R&TTE Directive of the European Union (1999/5/EC).This device will be sold
in the following EEA countries:Austria, Italy, Belgium, Liechtenstein, Denmark, Luxembourg, Finland,
Netherlands, France, Norway, Germany, Portugal, Greece, Spain, Iceland, Sweden, Ireland, United Kingdom,
Cyprus, Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Slovakia, Poland, Slovenia.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
ix
Compliances
EC Conformance Declaration
For product
the USAindicates
market, only
channel with
1~11the
canEssential
be operated.
Marking
by available
the aboveinsymbol
compliance
Selection
of other
channels
not possible.
Requirements
of the
R&TTE is
Directive
of the European Union (1999/5/EC). This
equipment meets the following conformance standards:
„ EN 60950 (IEC 60950) - Product Safety
„ EN 300 328 - Technical requirements for 2.4 GHz radio equipment
„ EN 301 489-1 / EN 301 489-17 - EMC requirements for radio equipment
Countries of Operation & Conditions of Use in the European Community
This device is intended to be operated in all countries of the European
Community. Requirements for outdoor operation, license requirements and
allowed channels of operation apply in some countries as described below:
NOTE
The user must use the configuration utility provided with this product to ensure the channels of
operation are in conformance with the spectrum usage rules for European Community countries as
described below.
„ This device requires that the user or installer properly enter the current
country of operation in the command line interface as described in the user
guide, before operating this device.
„ This device will automatically limit the allowable channels determined by the
current country of operation. Incorrectly entering the country of operation may
result in illegal operation and may cause harmful interference to other system.
The user is obligated to ensure the device is operating according to the
channel limitations, outdoor restrictions and license requirements for each
European Community country as described in this document.
„ This device may be operated indoors or outdoors in all countries of the
European Community using the 2.4 GHz band: Channels 1 - 13, except where
noted below.
‘ In Italy the end-user must apply for a license from the national spectrum
authority to operate this device outdoors.
‘ In Belgium outdoor operation is only permitted using the 2.46 - 2.4835
GHz band: Channel 13.
‘ In France outdoor operation is only permitted using the 2.4 - 2.454 GHz
band: Channels 1 - 7.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Compliances
Safety Compliance
Power Cord Safety
Please read the following safety information carefully before installing the device:
WARNING
Installation and removal of the unit must be carried out by qualified personnel only.
„ The unit must be connected to an earthed (grounded) outlet to comply with
international safety standards.
„ Do not connect the unit to an A.C. outlet (power supply) without an earth
(ground) connection.
„ The appliance coupler (the connector to the unit and not the wall plug) must
have a configuration for mating with an EN 60320/IEC 320 appliance inlet.
„ The socket outlet must be near to the unit and easily accessible. You can only
remove power from the unit by disconnecting the power cord from the outlet.
„ This unit operates under SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) conditions
according to IEC 60950. The conditions are only maintained if the equipment
to which it is connected also operates under SELV conditions.
France and Peru only
This unit cannot be powered from IT supplies. If your supplies are of IT type, this
unit must be powered by 230 V (2P+T) via an isolation transformer ratio 1:1, with
the secondary connection point labelled Neutral, connected directly to earth
(ground).
IMPORTANT
Before making connections, make sure you have the correct cord set. Check it (read the label on
the cable) against the following:
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
xi
Compliances
Power Cord Set
U.S.A. and Canada
The cord set must be UL-approved and CSA certified.
The minimum specifications for the flexible cord are:
- No. 18 AWG - not longer than 2 meters, or 16 AWG.
- Type SV or SJ
- 3-conductor
The cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least 10 A
The attachment plug must be an earth-grounding type with NEMA 5-15P
(15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration.
Denmark
The supply plug must comply with Section 107-2-D1, Standard DK2-1a or
DK2-5a.
Switzerland
The supply plug must comply with SEV/ASE 1011.
U.K.
The supply plug must comply with BS1363 (3-pin 13 A) and be fitted with
a 5 A fuse which complies with BS1362.
The mains cord must be  or  marked and be of type
HO3VVF3GO.75 (minimum).
Europe
The supply plug must comply with CEE7/7 (“SCHUKO”).
The mains cord must be  or  marked and be of type
HO3VVF3GO.75 (minimum).
IEC-320 receptacle.
xii
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
About This Manual
About This Manual
This manual describes the BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS Wi2 unit and
details how to install, operate and manage the access point.
This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting and
operating the BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS Wi2, and for system
administrators responsible for managing the system.
This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:
„ Chapter 1 - Product Description - Describes the Wi2 unit and its
functionality.
„ Chapter 2 - Installation - Describes how to install the Wi2 and how to
connect to subscriber’s equipment.
„ Chapter 3 - Initial Configuration - Describes how to initially configure the
access point in order to test basic link operation .
„ Chapter 4 - System Configuration- Describes advanced configuration of the
the access point.
„ Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface - Describes the command line interface
commands for configuring the access point.
„ Appendix A - Troubleshooting
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
xiii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Product Description
1.1
Introduction ................................................................................................................ 2
1.2
Specifications............................................................................................................. 4
1.2.1
Radio ............................................................................................................. 4
1.2.2
Sensitivity ...................................................................................................... 5
1.2.3
8 dBi Omni Antenna ...................................................................................... 5
1.2.4
Configuration and Management .................................................................... 6
1.2.5
Mechanical .................................................................................................... 7
1.2.6
Electrical........................................................................................................ 7
1.2.7
Connectors and LEDs ................................................................................... 7
1.2.8
Environmental .............................................................................................. 9
1.2.9
Standards Compliance .................................................................................. 9
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
2.1
2.2
2.3
Hardware Description .............................................................................................. 12
2.1.1
Bottom Panel............................................................................................... 13
2.1.2
Top Panel .................................................................................................... 14
2.1.3
LED Indicators............................................................................................. 14
Installation Requirements ....................................................................................... 16
2.2.1
Packing List ................................................................................................. 16
2.2.2
Additional/Optional Installation Requirements............................................. 16
2.2.3
Guidelines for Positioning Wi² ..................................................................... 17
Installation ................................................................................................................ 19
2.3.1
Attaching the SU-ODU to the Mounting Plate ............................................. 19
Table of Contents
2.4
2.3.2
Attaching the Mounting Plate to the Wi² unit ............................................... 21
2.3.3
Connecting the Wi² unit to the SU-ODU...................................................... 22
2.3.4
Preparing the Power Cable ......................................................................... 25
2.3.5
Pre-Configuration and Testing .................................................................... 27
2.3.6
Mounting the Wi² Unit.................................................................................. 28
2.3.7
Connecting the Grounding Cables .............................................................. 31
2.3.8
Connecting to Power Source....................................................................... 31
Post Installation Configuration of the AP/SU-ODU............................................... 32
Chapter 3 - Initial Configuration
3.1
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 34
3.2
Initial Setup through the CLI ................................................................................... 35
3.3
3.2.1
Configuration via Telnet .............................................................................. 35
3.2.2
Configuration via Console ........................................................................... 35
3.2.3
Initial Configuration Steps ........................................................................... 36
Logging In................................................................................................................. 38
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.1
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 42
4.2
Advanced Configuration ......................................................................................... 43
xvi
4.2.1
System Identification ................................................................................... 44
4.2.2
TCP / IP Settings......................................................................................... 45
4.2.3
RADIUS....................................................................................................... 48
4.2.4
SSH Settings ............................................................................................... 51
4.2.5
Authentication.............................................................................................. 53
4.2.6
Filter Control................................................................................................ 57
4.2.7
VLAN ........................................................................................................... 60
4.2.8
WDS Settings .............................................................................................. 62
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
Table of Contents
4.2.9
AP Management.......................................................................................... 62
4.2.10
Administration.............................................................................................. 64
4.2.11
System Log ................................................................................................. 70
4.2.12
RSSI ............................................................................................................ 74
4.3
SNMP......................................................................................................................... 75
4.4
Radio Interface ......................................................................................................... 81
4.5
4.4.1
Radio Settings G (802.11g)......................................................................... 81
4.4.2
Security ....................................................................................................... 98
Status Information ................................................................................................. 116
4.5.1
Access Point Status .................................................................................. 116
4.5.2
Station Status ............................................................................................ 118
4.5.3
Event Logs ................................................................................................ 120
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.1
5.2
Using the Command Line Interface...................................................................... 125
5.1.1
Accessing the CLI ..................................................................................... 125
5.1.2
Console Connection .................................................................................. 125
5.1.3
Telnet Connection ..................................................................................... 125
Entering Commands .............................................................................................. 127
5.2.1
Keywords and Arguments ......................................................................... 127
5.2.2
Minimum Abbreviation............................................................................... 127
5.2.3
Command Completion............................................................................... 127
5.2.4
Getting Help on Commands ...................................................................... 127
5.2.5
Partial Keyword Lookup ............................................................................ 128
5.2.6
Negating the Effect of Commands ............................................................ 128
5.2.7
Using Command History ........................................................................... 129
5.2.8
Understanding Command Modes.............................................................. 129
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
xvii
Table of Contents
5.2.9
Exec Commands ....................................................................................... 129
5.2.10
Configuration Commands.......................................................................... 130
5.2.11
Command Line Processing ....................................................................... 130
5.3
Command Groups.................................................................................................. 132
5.4
General Commands ............................................................................................... 134
5.5
xviii
5.4.1
configure.................................................................................................... 135
5.4.2
end ............................................................................................................ 135
5.4.3
exit............................................................................................................. 135
5.4.4
ping............................................................................................................ 136
5.4.5
reset .......................................................................................................... 136
5.4.6
show history .............................................................................................. 137
5.4.7
show line ................................................................................................... 137
System Management Commands......................................................................... 139
5.5.1
country....................................................................................................... 140
5.5.2
prompt ....................................................................................................... 141
5.5.3
system name ............................................................................................. 142
5.5.4
username .................................................................................................. 142
5.5.5
password ................................................................................................... 143
5.5.6
ip ssh-server enable .................................................................................. 143
5.5.7
ip ssh-server port....................................................................................... 144
5.5.8
ip telnet-server enable............................................................................... 144
5.5.9
ip http port ................................................................................................. 144
5.5.10
ip http server.............................................................................................. 145
5.5.11
ip http session-timeout .............................................................................. 145
5.5.12
ip https port................................................................................................ 146
5.5.13
ip https server............................................................................................ 146
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
Table of Contents
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.5.14
APmgmtIP ................................................................................................. 147
5.5.15
APmgmtUI ................................................................................................. 148
5.5.16
show apmanagement ................................................................................ 148
5.5.17
show system.............................................................................................. 149
5.5.18
show version ............................................................................................. 150
5.5.19
show config ............................................................................................... 151
5.5.20
show hardware .......................................................................................... 156
System Logging Commands................................................................................. 157
5.6.1
logging on.................................................................................................. 157
5.6.2
logging host ............................................................................................... 157
5.6.3
logging console ......................................................................................... 158
5.6.4
logging level .............................................................................................. 158
5.6.5
logging facility-type.................................................................................... 159
5.6.6
logging clear .............................................................................................. 160
5.6.7
show logging ............................................................................................. 160
5.6.8
show event-log .......................................................................................... 161
System Clock Commands ..................................................................................... 162
5.7.1
sntp-server ip............................................................................................. 162
5.7.2
sntp-server enable..................................................................................... 163
5.7.3
sntp-server date-time ................................................................................ 163
5.7.4
sntp-server daylight-saving ....................................................................... 164
5.7.5
sntp-server timezone................................................................................. 164
5.7.6
show sntp .................................................................................................. 165
DHCP Relay Commands........................................................................................ 166
5.8.1
dhcp-relay enable...................................................................................... 166
5.8.2
dhcp-relay.................................................................................................. 166
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
xix
Table of Contents
5.8.3
5.9
show dhcp-relay ........................................................................................ 167
SNMP Commands .................................................................................................. 168
5.9.1
snmp-server community ............................................................................ 168
5.9.2
snmp-server contact.................................................................................. 169
5.9.3
snmp-server location ................................................................................. 169
5.9.4
snmp-server enable server........................................................................ 170
5.9.5
snmp-server host ...................................................................................... 170
5.9.6
snmp-server trap ....................................................................................... 171
5.9.7
snmp-server engine-id............................................................................... 172
5.9.8
snmp-server user ...................................................................................... 173
5.9.9
snmp-server targets .................................................................................. 174
5.9.10
snmp-server filter....................................................................................... 174
5.9.11
snmp-server filter-assignments ................................................................. 175
5.9.12
show snmp groups .................................................................................... 176
5.9.13
show snmp users ...................................................................................... 176
5.9.14
show snmp group-assignments................................................................. 177
5.9.15
show snmp target ...................................................................................... 177
5.9.16
show snmp filter ........................................................................................ 178
5.9.17
show snmp filter-assignments ................................................................... 178
5.9.18
show snmp ................................................................................................ 179
5.10 Flash/File Commands ............................................................................................ 181
xx
5.10.1
bootfile....................................................................................................... 181
5.10.2
copy .......................................................................................................... 181
5.10.3
delete......................................................................................................... 182
5.10.4
dir .............................................................................................................. 183
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
Table of Contents
5.10.5
show bootfile ............................................................................................. 184
5.11 RADIUS Client ........................................................................................................ 185
5.11.1
radius-server address................................................................................ 185
5.11.2
radius-server port ...................................................................................... 186
5.11.3
radius-server key....................................................................................... 186
5.11.4
radius-server retransmit ............................................................................ 186
5.11.5
radius-server timeout................................................................................. 187
5.11.6
radius-server port-accounting.................................................................... 187
5.11.7
radius-server timeout-interim..................................................................... 188
5.11.8
radius-server radius-mac-format ............................................................... 188
5.11.9
radius-server vlan-format .......................................................................... 189
5.11.10 show radius ............................................................................................... 189
5.12 802.1X Authentication............................................................................................ 191
5.12.1
802.1x........................................................................................................ 191
5.12.2
802.1x-supplicant enable .......................................................................... 192
5.12.3
802.1x-supplicant user .............................................................................. 192
5.12.4
show authentication................................................................................... 193
5.13 MAC Address Authentication ............................................................................... 194
5.13.1
address filter default .................................................................................. 194
5.13.2
address filter entry..................................................................................... 195
5.13.3
address filter delete ................................................................................... 195
5.13.4
mac-authentication server ......................................................................... 196
5.13.5
mac-authentication session-timeout.......................................................... 196
5.14 Filtering Commands .............................................................................................. 198
5.14.1
filter ap-manage ........................................................................................ 198
5.14.2
filter uplink enable ..................................................................................... 198
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
xxi
Table of Contents
5.14.3
filter uplink ................................................................................................. 199
5.14.4
filter ethernet-type enable.......................................................................... 199
5.14.5
filter ethernet-type protocol........................................................................ 200
5.14.6
show filters ................................................................................................ 201
5.15 WDS Bridge Commands........................................................................................ 202
5.16 Spanning Tree Commands.................................................................................... 203
5.17 Ethernet Interface Commands .............................................................................. 204
5.17.1
interface ethernet ...................................................................................... 204
5.17.2
dns server.................................................................................................. 204
5.17.3
ip address.................................................................................................. 205
5.17.4
ip dhcp....................................................................................................... 206
5.17.5
speed-duplex............................................................................................. 206
5.17.6
shutdown ................................................................................................... 207
5.17.7
show interface ethernet ............................................................................. 207
5.18 Wireless Interface Commands.............................................................................. 209
5.18.1
interface wireless....................................................................................... 210
5.18.2
vap............................................................................................................. 210
5.18.3
speed......................................................................................................... 211
5.18.4
multicast-data-rate..................................................................................... 211
5.18.5
channel...................................................................................................... 213
5.18.6
transmit-power........................................................................................... 213
5.18.7
radio-mode ................................................................................................ 214
5.18.8
preamble ................................................................................................... 214
5.18.9
antenna control.......................................................................................... 215
5.18.10 antenna id.................................................................................................. 215
5.18.11 antenna location ........................................................................................ 216
xxii
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
Table of Contents
5.18.12 beacon-interval.......................................................................................... 216
5.18.13 dtim-period ................................................................................................ 216
5.18.14 fragmentation-length ................................................................................. 217
5.18.15 rts-threshold .............................................................................................. 218
5.18.16 super-g ...................................................................................................... 218
5.18.17 description ................................................................................................. 219
5.18.18 ssid ............................................................................................................ 219
5.18.19 closed-system ........................................................................................... 220
5.18.20 max-association ........................................................................................ 220
5.18.21 assoc-timeout-interval ............................................................................... 221
5.18.22 auth-timeout-value..................................................................................... 221
5.18.23 shutdown ................................................................................................... 221
5.18.24 show interface wireless ............................................................................. 222
5.18.25 show station .............................................................................................. 224
5.19 Rogue AP Detection Commands .......................................................................... 226
5.19.1
rogue-ap enable ........................................................................................ 226
5.19.2
rogue-ap authenticate ............................................................................... 227
5.19.3
rogue-ap duration ...................................................................................... 227
5.19.4
rogue-ap interval ....................................................................................... 228
5.19.5
rogue-ap scan ........................................................................................... 228
5.19.6
show rogue-ap........................................................................................... 229
5.20 Wireless Security Commands............................................................................... 230
5.20.1
auth ........................................................................................................... 230
5.20.2
encryption.................................................................................................. 232
5.20.3
key............................................................................................................. 232
5.20.4
transmit-key............................................................................................... 233
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
xxiii
Table of Contents
5.20.5
cipher-suite................................................................................................ 234
5.20.6
mic_mode.................................................................................................. 235
5.20.7
wpa-pre-shared-key .................................................................................. 235
5.20.8
pmksa-lifetime ........................................................................................... 236
5.20.9
pre-authentication...................................................................................... 236
5.21 Link Integrity Commands ...................................................................................... 238
5.21.1
link-integrity ping-detect ............................................................................ 238
5.21.2
link-integrity ping-host ............................................................................... 239
5.21.3
link-integrity ping-interval........................................................................... 239
5.21.4
link-integrity ping-fail-retry ......................................................................... 239
5.21.5
link-integrity ethernet-detect ...................................................................... 240
5.21.6
show link-integrity...................................................................................... 240
5.22 IAPP Commands .................................................................................................... 241
5.22.1
iapp............................................................................................................ 241
5.23 VLAN Commands................................................................................................... 242
5.23.1
vlan............................................................................................................ 242
5.23.2
management-vlanid................................................................................... 243
5.23.3
vlan-id........................................................................................................ 243
5.24 WMM Commands ................................................................................................... 245
5.24.1
wmm.......................................................................................................... 245
5.24.2
wmm-acknowledge-policy ......................................................................... 245
5.24.3
wmmparam................................................................................................ 246
Appendix A - Troubleshooting
Glossary ................................................................................................ 253
Index ..................................................................................................... 259
xxiv
BreezeMAX Wi2 and BreezeACCESS VL Wi2 System Manual
1
Chapter 1 - Product Description
In This Chapter:
„ “Introduction” on page 2
„ “Specifications” on page 4
Chapter 1 - Product Description
1.1
Introduction
Alvarion's Wi² suite of converged solutions, including BreezeMAX Wi²and
BreezeACCESS Wi²("Wi²"), unites the advantages of the popular WiFi access with
the powerful capabilities of BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESS VL/4900
(“BreezeACCESS”) systems to provide cost-effective solutions for personal
broadband services.
The Wi² system comprises a self-contained combination of an advanced WiFi
access point and a BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESSSU-ODU that provides backhaul
connectivity. With its advanced roaming software, the Wi² can be deployed almost
anywhere to provide broadband mobility to standard WiFi (IEEE 802.11 b/g) end
user devices. Used in conjunction with Alvarion's market-leading BreezeMAX or
BreezeACCESS base stations, the Wi² can be used to expand the existing
capabilities of Alvarion's WiMAX and pre-WiMAX networks. Using the Wi², a
BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESS network can be used to provide personal
broadband services to high-end business as well as residential users equipped
with WiFi enabled devices such as laptops, PDAs, smart-phones, and portable
gaming devices. As a converged system, the Wi² also gives operators the ability to
seamlessly transition to a fully mobile WiMAX network with managed services for
personal broadband users.
Operating in both licensed and licensed-exempt frequencies, the Wi² system
leverages the easy availability of WiFi technology - along with the power and
robustness of BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESS broadband wireless access system to answer critical public and private sector needs such as traffic management,
video surveillance, public Internet access, homeland security, and various
nomadic applications.
The Wi² is a self-contained, robust all-outdoor system that comprises three
elements:
„ A feature-rich WiFi (IEEE 802.11 b/g) Access Point (AP)
„ A BreezeMAX/BreezeACCESS VL/BreezeACCESS 4900 SU-ODU (supplied
separately).
„ A power supply module that provides power to both the WiFi AP and the
SU-ODU.
The Wi² system requires only a single connection to either AC or DC power. With
its easy installation and operation, high performance, and rich security and QoS
System Description
Introduction
feature sets, the Wi² is an ideal solution for operators, municipalities and
communities looking to build metropolitan broadband networks or to integrate
WiFi hot zone capabilities into their existing broadband wireless access networks.
The result is personal broadband services ranging from public Internet access to
public safety and Intranet applications.
NOTE
This document describes how to install and manage the Wi² system, including the installation and
connections of a BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESS SU-ODU when installed on the mounting plate of
the Wi2 system. For details on other installation options for the SU-ODU and how to manage it, refer
to the relevant BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESS VL/4900 documents.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Chapter 1 - Product Description
1.2
Specifications
1.2.1
Radio
Table 1-1: Radio Specifications
Item
Description
Radio Type
IEEE 802.11b/g
Radio Mode
802.11b+g, 802.11b only, 802.11g only
Frequency Band
2400-2497 MHz
Operating Channels
ETSI (EUR): 2412 ~ 2472 MHz(CH1-CH13)
MKK (Japan) 11b: 2412 ~ 2484 MHz (CH1-CH14)
MKK (Japan) 11g: 2412 ~ 2472 MHz(CH1-CH13)
France: 2457 ~ 2472 MHz(CH10-CH13)
US & Canada: 2400 ~ 2483.5 MHz(CH1~CH11)
Channel Bandwidth
20 MHz
Data Rates
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
Turbo Mode (802.11g Super G)
Turbo Mode: 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54, 96, 108 Mbps per channel
802.11b Radio Technology
Direct Sequence-Spread Spectrum (DSSS)
802.11b Modulation Technique
Differential Binary Phase Shift Keying (DBPSK) @ 1 Mbps
Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DQPSK) @ 2 Mbps
Complementary Code Keying (CCK) @ 5.5 and 11 Mbps
802.11b Radio Technology
Orthogonal Frequency Divisional Multiplexing (OFDM)
802.11b Modulation Technique
Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) @ 6 and 9 Mbps
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) @ 12 and 18 Mbps
16-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) @ 24 & 36 Mbps
64-QAM @ 48 & 54 Mbps
FEC Coding Rates
1/2 2/3, 3/4
Max Tx Power
11b: 20.36dBm
11g: 24.96dBm
11g turbo: 24.53dBm
TPC (Transmit Power Control)
100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, Min.
Antenna Ports
2 x N-Type, 50 ohm
Antenna Diversity
Rx antenna switching by energy sensing
System Description
Specifications
1.2.2
Sensitivity
Table 1-2: Sensitivity
Data Rate
Sensitivity (dBm)
802.11b, 1 Mbps
-96
802.11b, 2 Mbps
-93
802.11b, 5.5 Mbps
-93
802.11b, 11 Mbps
-90
802.11g, 6 Mbps
-91
802.11g, 9 Mbps
-90
802.11g, 12 Mbps
-89
802.11g, 18 Mbps
-88
802.11g, 24 Mbps
-84
802.11g, 36 Mbps
-80
802.11g, 48 Mbps
-75
802.11g, 54 Mbps
-73
1.2.3
8 dBi Omni Antenna
Table 1-3: 8 dBi Omni Antenna
Item
Description
Antenna gain
8 dBi
VSWR
2:1 max
Antenna Polarization
Linear Vertical
Horizontal Plane
360°
Vertical Plane
15°
Dimensions
52 cm x 1.9 cm diameter
Weight
340 g
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Chapter 1 - Product Description
1.2.4
Configuration and Management
Table 1-4: Configuration and Management
Item
Description
Management options
„ Web-based (HTTP/HTTPS)
„ Telnet
„ SSH
„ SNMP
SNMP agent
V1 / V2c, supports 802.11 MIB, RFC-1213 MIB II and private MIB.
Management access
„ Local via Console port
„ From the backhaul network
„ From WiFi clients
Management access protection
„ Access Password
„ Enable/Disable access from wireless clients
„ Enable/Disable access using web/Telnet/SNMP
„ Restrict access to authorized stations (by IP)
WiFi Clients Authentication
„ Local/RADIUS MAC List
„ IEEE 802.1x
Encryption
„ WEP
„ WPA/TKIP over 802.1x or PSK (Pre-shared Key)
„ 802.11i / WPA2 (AES-CCMP) over 802.1x or PSK
„ Mixed WPA and WEP clients support
Allocation of IP parameters
Configurable or automatic (DHCP client)
WiFi Multi-Media Support
Four QoS levels using the WMM standard according to IEEE 802.11e
Software upgrade
HTTP/FTP/TFTP
Configuration Upload/Download
FTP/TFTP
System Description
Specifications
1.2.5
Mechanical
Table 1-5: Mechanical Specifications
Item
Description
Dimensions
278mm (W) X 279mm (H) X 240mm (D)
Weight
5.8Kg (excluding antennas and backhauling CPE)
AC Power Supply
85-260VAC, 47-63Hz, maximum power consumption 2.5A
Mounting Plate Tilt
+/- 150
Mounting Plate Rotation
+/- 450
1.2.6
Electrical
Table 1-6: Electrical Specifications
Type
Details
AC Power Supply
85-260VAC, 47-63Hz, maximum power consumption 2.5A
DC Power supply
42 VDC to 60 VDC, maximum power consumption 3.5A
AC/DC Power Switching
When both AC and DC power sources are connected, AC power input will be
used as long as internal power supplies are working properly. The unit will switch
to DC power source if AC power input fails, or the internal power supplies fail,
and the DC power input is in the proper range.
1.2.7
Connectors and LEDs
Table 1-7: Connectors and LEDs
Type
Description
AC IN
Connection to AC mains. 3-pin power plug, Bulgin PX0732/S/07
SU
Ethernet and power connection to backhauling CPE.
RJ-45, in a weather protected service box
AP
Ethernet and power connection to AP (PoE).
RJ-45, in a weather protected service box
DC IN
Connection to DC power source. 2-pin power plug, Bulgin
PoE
Ethernet and power connection, 8-pins DIN jack
10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with auto-negotiation
Console
RS232 DTE, 3-pins DIN jack
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Chapter 1 - Product Description
Table 1-7: Connectors and LEDs
Type
Description
LEDs
„ Power
„ Link (Ethernet link integrity/activity)
„ 11b/g: 3 LEDs indicating wireless link activity
System Description
Specifications
1.2.8
Environmental
Table 1-8: Environmental Specifications
Item
Details
Operating Temperature
-400C to 600C non condensing 5º~55ºC
Storage Temperature
-550C to 800C non condensing 5º~70ºC
Humidity
Maximum 95%.
Water Proof
IP-67
Solar Radiation protection
IEC 60068-2-5
Salt
IEC 60068 part 2-52
Transportation
ETS 300 019-2-2 Class 2.3 Pubic Transportation
Storage shock
IEC 68-2-29
Storage drop
IEC 68-2-32
Wind operation
160 Km/hour
Wind survival
220 Km/hour
1.2.9
Standards Compliance
Table 1-9: Standards Compliance
Type
Standard
EMC
„ EN55022 CE Class B
„ FCC Class B Part 15
„ VCCI Class B
Safety
„ UL / CUL (CSA60950-1, UL60950-1)
„ CE / CB (EN60950/IEC 60950-1)
Lightning
The unit withstand at +4KV of Input surge, 1.2usec rise/fall time, 50µsec duration,
every 10 seconds, for all interfaces.
Radio
„ ETSI 300 328 (11b/g)
„ ETSI 301 489 (DC power)
„ FCC Part 15C 15.247/15.207 (11b/g)
„ TELEC
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
2
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
In This Chapter:
„ “Hardware Description” on page 12
„ “Installation Requirements” on page 16
„ “Installation” on page 19
‘ “Attaching the SU-ODU to the Mounting Plate” on page 19
‘ “Attaching the Mounting Plate to the Wi² unit” on page 21
‘ “Connecting the Wi² unit to the SU-ODU” on page 22
‘ “Preparing the Power Cable” on page 25
‘ “Pre-Configuration and Testing” on page 27
‘ “Mounting the Wi² Unit” on page 28
‘ “Connecting the Antenna(s)” on page 31
‘ “Connecting the Grounding Cables” on page 31
‘ “Connecting to Power Source” on page 31
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
2.1
Hardware Description
The Wi² consists of a WiFi access point with an integrated power supply and
interface module that connects to either a BreezeMAX or BreezeACCESS outdoor
unit (SU-ODU) for backhaul and network management software. Each unit is
housed in a weatherproof enclosure for mounting outdoors.
Antenna Connectors
(Top Panel)
SU-ODU
Mounting
Plate
Pole Mounting
Bracket
LEDs
Grounding
Stud
Connections
(Bottom Panel)
Figure 2-1: Wi² Unit (with SU-ODU attached)
NOTE
The diagram in Figure 2-1 includes a mounting plate and an SU-ODU. The SU-ODU can also be
installed separately, in which case there is no need to attach the mounting plate to the Wi² unit.
12
Installation
Hardware Description
2.1.1
Bottom Panel
Figure 2-2 shows the bottom panel of the Wi² unit and Table 2-10 lists the
components.
WiFi Access Point
(AP)
Power Supply
and
Interface Module
Figure 2-2: Bottom Panel (without the SU-ODU)
Table 2-10: Bottom Panel Components
Element
Item
Description
Power Supply and Interface
Module
Console Port Cover Holder
Holder for waterproof protection cover
for console port when port is not in use.
Console Port
Connection to console port for system
management.
PoE Port
An Ethernet cable connects the PoE port
to the AP port in the WiFi access point.
Impermeability Test Screw
Do not remove or loosen this screw.
Doing so may impair the sealing of the
unit against moisture and humidity.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
13
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
Table 2-10: Bottom Panel Components
Element
Item
Description
WiFI Access Point (AP)
AC Power Plug
3-pin power plug for connection to AC
power source.
AP Port
An Ethernet cable connects the AP port
to the PoE port i n the power supply and
interface module.
SU Port
Connection to BreezeMAX or
BreezeACCESS outdoor unit
DC Power Plug)
2-pin power plug for connection to DC
power source.
2.1.2
Top Panel
Figure 2-3: Top Panel (without the SU-ODU)
Figure 2-3 shows the top panel of the Wi² unit with two N-type RF connectors for
external antennas.
2.1.3
LED Indicators
The Wi² includes eight status LED indicators. Figure 2-4 shows the LEDs and
Table 2-11 describes the system status.
14
Installation
Hardware Description
Figure 2-4: LED Indicators
Table 2-11: LED Indicators
LED
Status
Description
Power
On Green
Indicates that the system is working
normally.
On Amber
Indicates a power shutdown due to a low
temperature condition.
On Green
Indicates a valid 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
cable link.
Flashing
Green
Indicates that the Wi² is transmitting or
receiving data on a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
LAN. Flashing rate is proportional to
network activity.
Off
No signal detected or the 802.11b/g radio is
disabled.
Slow Flashing
Green
The 802.11b/g radio is enabled with a low
level of network activity.
Fast Flashing
Green
Indicates a medium level of network
activity.
On Green
Indicates a high level of network activity.
Link
11b/g
(three
LEDs)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
15
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
2.2
Installation Requirements
This section describes all the supplies required to install the Wi² and the items
included in each installation package.
2.2.1
Packing List
The BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² installation kit includes the following
components:
„ Wi² unit
„ SU-ODU mounting plate
„ 4 x M8 x 16 hex head screws + flat washers + spring washers
„ 4 x 1/4” x 1/2” hex head screws + flat washers + spring washers
„ 4 x M6 x 12 hex head screws with integral washers
„ 55 cm category 5E Ethernet cable with two RJ-45 connectors, one shielded
with a metal service box.
„ AC power connector
„ 2 x 9/16" (530 mm) metal bands
„ 3 m Ethernet data cable for connecting the PoE port to the AP port (2 pairs
straight)
2.2.2
Additional/Optional Installation Requirements
„ Category 5E cable* for connecting to an SU-ODU if installed separately
(maximum length 100m.)
„ Rubber sealing cap (supplied with SU-ODU)
„ Crimping tool for RJ-45 connectors
„ RS232 console cable*
16
Installation
Installation Requirements
„ One or two 8 dBi Omni directional Antenna(s)*
„ UL/CSA listed smooth circular power cable, 1.5mm to 2.5mm each. Outer
diameter 7mm to 9mm, UV resistant, temperatures range -400C to +650C min.
Other specifications (such as oil resistance, no of wires) according to specific
installation requirements.
„ A mains plug (if connecting to AC mains)
„ Grounding cable with an appropriate termination.
„ Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means for installing the
Wi² and antenna .
„ A PC with an Ethernet NIC for configuring basic parameters of the WiFi AP and
the SU-ODU.
„ Wall - Tilt Pole Mounting kit* (page 28 )
„ DC power connector* (pack of 5)
„ Waterproof covers for AC/DC socket* (pack of 5)
„ Spirit level
NOTE
Before starting to install the Wi² unit, check that you have all the necessary parts and accessories.
Optional accessories marked with an * can be ordered from your supplier.
2.2.3
Guidelines for Positioning Wi²
CAUTION
ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes
and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should
install outdoor units and antennas.
Failure to do so may void the product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to
legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage
or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or antennas.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
17
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
The Wi² should be mounted vertically on a 1"-4" pole. Its location should enable
easy access to the unit and its connectors for installation and maintenance and
should have a clear or near line of sight to the area to be covered.
The SU-ODU attached to the unit should have a clear or near line of sight to the
base stations. For further information about the optimal installation location of
the SU-ODU refer to the relevant manual.
18
Installation
Installation
2.3
Installation
The following sections describe how to install a Wi² unit, including attaching the
SU-ODU to the mounting plate, attaching the mounting plate to the Wi² unit,
connecting to the SU-ODU, pole mounting, connecting a grounding cable, and
connecting the antenna(s).
2.3.1
Attaching the SU-ODU to the Mounting Plate
IMPORTANT
The angle at which the SU-ODU is mounted on the Wi² can be adapted depending on the location
of the Wi² unit in relation to the base station. Once attached, the mounting plate can be tilted either
up or down. Before attaching the SU-ODU to the mounting plate, determine the direction of the tilt.
To attach a BreezeMAX PRO-S ODU or BreezeACCESSSU-ODU with HW Revision E
to the mounting plate:
NOTE
BreezeACCESS SU-ODU with HW Revision E is the new, smaller size ODU available in the 5.4 and
5.8 GHz bands.
Determine the tilt direction of the SU-ODU.
Using the M8 x 16 hex head screws and the flat washers and spring washers
supplied, attach the SU-ODU to the mounting plate as shown in Figure 2-5 in
the direction marked.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
19
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
Figure 2-5: Attaching BreezeMAX PRO-S ODU or BreezeACCESSSU-ODU with HW Revision E to
Mounting Plate
NOTE
For information about polarization refer to the relevant manual.
To attach a BreezeACCESS SU-ODU with HW Revision D or lower to the mounting
plate:
Determine the tilt direction of the SU-ODU.
Using the 1/4” x 1/2” hex head screws and the flat washers and spring
washers supplied, attach the SU-ODU to the mounting plate as shown in
Figure 2-6 in the direction marked.
20
Installation
Installation
Figure 2-6: Attaching BreezeACCESS SU-ODU with HW Revision D or lower to Mounting Plate
NOTE
Sometimes, physical circumstance require that the SU-ODU be located at a distance from the Wi²
unit and not attached to the mounting plate. For further information see the section on SU-ODU
mounting in the relevant manual.
2.3.2
Attaching the Mounting Plate to the Wi² unit
Hold the mounting plate with SU-ODU attached so the tilt label faces in the
tilt direction that you have decided upon (see Section 2.3.1).
Using the M6 x 12 hex head screws with integral washers, attach the
mounting plate to the Wi² unit as shown in Figure 2-7.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
21
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
Figure 2-7: Attaching the Mounting Plate to the Wi² Unit
Adjust the tilt angle according the scale marked on the mounting plate and
tighten the screws.
2.3.3
Connecting the Wi² unit to the SU-ODU
NOTE
The Wi² installation kit includes a Category 5E Ethernet cable, suitable for connecting to
BreezeMAX PRO-S and BreezeACCESSHW revision E SU-ODU units. For instructions on how to
adapt the Ethernet cable for connecting to a BreezeACCESS SU-ODU with HW revision D or lower
refer to Section 2.3.3.1, “Adapting the Ethernet Cable for Connecting to BreezeACCESS SU-ODU
with HW Revision D or lower” on page 2-24
To connect the Wi² to BreezeMAX PRO-S and BreezeACCESS HW revision E
SU-ODU units:
The rubber sealing cap (supplied with the SU-ODU) has a special groove
allowing to insert an ethernet cable with an already assembled RJ-45
connector through the cap. To expose the groove, lightly squeeze the cap (see
Figure 2-8). Carefully insert the unshielded end of category 5E Ethernet cable
supplied through the groove.
22
Installation
Installation
groove
Figure 2-8: Sealing Cap
Expose the RJ-45 connector under the sealing cap on the Ethernet cable and
connect to the SU-ODU RJ-45 connector (Figure 2-9).
Figure 2-9: Connecting the SU-ODU connector and inserting the Sealing Cap
Put the sealing cap back in its place. Make sure that the small protrusion on
the side of the cap fits inside the hole on the connector's protective body.
Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the SU port on the Wi² unit.
Verify that the O-ring supplied with the service box kit is in place, attach the
service box to the unit and tighten the top nut.
Use appropriate sealing material to protect the connection to the SU-ODU
against moisture and humidity. Use removable sealing material to enable
future access to the connector.
NOTE
Use high quality sealing material such as Scotch® 130C Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape from 3M to
ensure IP-67 compliant protection against dust and water.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
23
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
2.3.3.1
Adapting the Ethernet Cable for Connecting to
BreezeACCESS SU-ODU with HW Revision D or lower
The rubber sealing cap on the Category 5E Ethernet cable supplied does not suit
all SU-ODU units and sometimes has to be changed.
To adapt the Ethernet cable for connecting to a BreezeACCESS SU-ODU with HW
Revision D or lower:
Lightly squeeze the groove on the sealing cap on the Ethernet cable and
remove the sealing cap (see Figure 2-8).
Cut the cable and remove the RJ-45 connector.
Route the cable through the service box supplied with the SU-ODU.
Use a crimp tool to prepare the wires, insert them into the appropriate pins as
outlined on the service box and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector.
Make sure to do the following:
‘ Remove as small a length as possible of the external jacket of the wires.
Verify that the external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good
sealing.
‘ Pull back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ-45
connector, to ensure a good connection with the connector's shield after
crimping.
Connect the Ethernet cable to the SU-ODU RJ-45 connector.
Make sure that the external jacket of the cable is well inside the service box to
guarantee a good seal.
Verify that the O-ring of the service box kit is in place , attach the service box
to the unit and tighten the top nut.
24
Installation
Installation
2.3.4
Preparing the Power Cable
CAUTION
Electric Shock Hazard. Only a licensed electrician should connect the power plug.
All mains used outdoors, in damp or wet conditions, should be supplied from a correctly fused
source and protected according to applicable local regulations.
To prepare the power cable:
Use a UL/CSA listed smooth circular power cable, 1.5mm to 2.5mm each.
Outer diameter 7mm to 9mm, UV resistant, temperature range -40°C to +
65°C (-40°F to +149°F) minimum. Other specifications (such as oil resistance,
no of wires) according to specific installation requirements.
Use a cap assembly tool to unscrew the locking nut.
Thread the cable through component parts as shown in Figure 2-10.
NOTE
Figure 2-10 shows an AC power jack. The DC power jack is similar, but only has two sockets.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
25
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
Figure 2-10: Preparing the Power Cable
Strip insulation from wires as shown in Figure 2-10.
Insert bare wire ends into the terminals and fully tighten the screws. The wires
should be connected as shown below:
AC
DC
Brown
Phase ~
Red
Blue
Neutral 0
Black
Yellow/green
Grounding
Draw cable back until socket insert is correctly seated in D-shaped location in
the main body. Tighten the Gland nut. Screw back the locking ring using the
cap assembly tool.
For an AC cable, connect a mains plug to the other end of the cable. For a DC
cable, connect the appropriate termination.
26
Installation
Installation
2.3.5
Pre-Configuration and Testing
It is highly recommended that you configure the parameters of the Access Point
(AP) unit and the SU-ODU and verify proper operation of the system in the
laboratory before installing the Wi² unit.
To configure the AP unit:
Set up the unit a short distance (4.5m to 7.5m) from an approved test unit,
either outdoors or indoors.
Connect the power cable to the power socket on the unit. Connect the other
end to the mains supply.
Check that the LED on the Wi² is green indicating that the system is working
normally.
Using Telnet, login as outlined in Chapter 3 - "Initial Configuration" and
complete the initial configuration.
Complete the configuration of the AP, using either Telnet or the web-based
interface as outlined in Chapter 4 - "System Configuration".
Disconnect the cable connecting the SU-ODU to the SU port of the Wi²unit.
Connect an SU-IDU to the SU-ODU.
Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the IDU and configure its parameters. For
configuration details refer to the relevant manual.
After configuring the parameters of the AP and SU-ODU and verifying proper
operation of the system, disconnect the unit from the power source and
proceed to mount the unit as outlined in Section 2.3.6.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
27
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
2.3.6
Mounting the Wi² Unit
To pole mount the Wi² unit:
With the bottom panel of the unit facing downwards, thread the two 9/16"
wide metal bands supplied through the brackets on the sides of the unit.
Rotate the mounting bracket, so that the Wi² faces the Base Station.
NOTE
The mounting bracket can be rotated up to 45o in any direction.
Secure the Wi² unit to a pole as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11: Pole Mounting the Wi²
2.3.6.1
Mounting the Wi² using the Tilt Accessory
The Wi² can also be installed on a wall or on a non-vertical pole using an optional
tilt accessory kit. The tilt accessory kit ( Figure 2-12) includes:
„
A mounting bracket
„ 3 metal bands for attaching the bracket to a pole
28
Installation
Installation
„ Screws for attaching the bracket to a wall
„ A 50 cm pole (diameter 6.03 cm)
„ Screws for attaching the pole to mounting bracket
Figure 2-12: Tilt Accessory Kit
To mount the tilt accessory on a wall:
Place the bracket on the wall and use as a template to mark the position of the
holes to be drilled for the screws .
Remove the bracket from the wall and drill a hole in each of the locations
marked.
Insert anchors into the holes.
Hold the bracket over the holes and insert a screw into each of the holes in the
bracket, and screw into the anchors in the wall. Secure the bracket to the wall,
making sure that the screw heads are as level with the bracket as possible.
To mount the tilt accessory on a non-vertical pole:
„ Thread the metal bands provides with the tilt accessory through the slits in
the bracket and attach to the pole as shown in Figure 2-13.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
29
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
Figure 2-13: Mounting Tilt Accessory on Non-Vertical Pole
To mount the Wi² using the tilt accessory:
Mount the tilt accessory bracket on the wall or pole as described above.
Using the screws provided attach the pole to the tilt accessory bracket.
Using a spirit level, adjust the angle of the pole until it is vertical and tighten
the screws to hold in place.
Secure the Wi² to the pole as described in “Mounting the Wi² Unit” on page 28.
Figure 2-14: Wi² Mounting Using the Tilt Accessory
30
Installation
Installation
2.3.7
Connecting the Grounding Cables
To connect the grounding cables:
Connect a grounding cable to the grounding stud on theWi² unit and tighten
the grounding screw firmly.
Connect a grounding cable to the grounding stud on the SU-ODU and tighten
the grounding screw firmly.
Connect the other ends of the grounding cables to a good ground (earth)
connection.
CAUTION
Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national electrical codes. For
additional lightning protection, use lightning rods, lightning arrestors, or surge suppressors.
2.3.8
Connecting to Power Source
Connect the power cable (see Section 2.3.4) to the power socket on the unit
and to the mains supply.
CAUTION
The Wi² can be connected to either an AC or DC power source, or to both. By default the DC plug is
covered with a waterproof sealing cap which must be removed before connecting to the power
cable. Any socket that is NOT in use must always be protected from moisture and must be covered
with a waterproof sealing cap.
Check that the LED on the Wi² is green indicating that the system is working
normally.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
31
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation
2.4
Post Installation Configuration of the
AP/SU-ODU
As mentioned before, it is highly recommended to complete configuration of the AP
and SU-ODU in the lab prior to installation. After initial configuration proceed to
advanced configuration via the web-based interface, Telnet, SSH, SNM web/SSH
or backhaul wireless link. See Chapter 4 - "System Configuration" for further
details.
32
Installation
3
Chapter 3 - Initial Configuration
In This Chapter:
„ “Introduction” on page 34
„ “Initial Setup through the CLI” on page 35
‘ “Configuration via Telnet” on page 35
‘ “Configuration via Console” on page 35
‘ “Initial Configuration Steps” on page 36
„ “Logging In” on page 38
Chapter 3 - Initial Configuration
3.1
Introduction
The Access Point (AP) unit offers a variety of management options, including a
web-based interface, Telnet, SSH, SNMP and a direct connection to the console
port.
The initial configuration steps can be made through the web browser interface or
CLI.
34
Commissioning
Initial Setup through the CLI
3.2
Initial Setup through the CLI
For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line Interface”
on page 125. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using
the CLI, refer to “Command Groups” on page 132.
3.2.1
Configuration via Telnet
By default, use the Telnet option to configure the unit. The AP uses the default
address 192.168.1.1. This address may not be compatible with your network. You
will therefore have to use the command line interface (CLI) to assign an IP address
that is compatible with your network as described on page 36.
Use the category 5 Ethernet data cable (2 pairs crosswire) provided to connect the
SU port on the Wi² unit to your PC and Telnet the unit to start the initial setup.
3.2.2
Configuration via Console
The Wi² has a console port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for
monitoring and configuration. Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC
running a terminal emulation program to the Wi² using an RS232 console cable.
To connect to the console port:
Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running
terminal emulation software.
Connect the other end of the cable to the console port on the Wi² unit.
Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:-:
‘ Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or 2).
‘ Set the data rate to 9600 baud.
‘ Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
‘ Set flow control to none.
‘ Set the emulation mode to VT100.
‘ When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.
Once you have set up the terminal correctly, press the [Enter] key to initiate
the console connection. The console login screen is displayed.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
35
Chapter 3 - Initial Configuration
3.2.3
Initial Configuration Steps
Logging In – Enter admin for the user name. The default password is null, so just
press [Enter] at the password prompt. The CLI prompt appears displaying
Enterprise AP#.
Username: admin
Password:
Enterprise AP#
Setting the Country Code – You must use the CLI to set the country code.
Setting the country code restricts operation of the AP to the radio channels and
transmit power levels permitted for wireless networks in the specified country.
NOTE
For American and Canadian customers only channels 1~11 are permitted. Setting of other channels
is not possible.
Type exit to leave configuration mode. Then type country ? to display the list of
countries. Select the code for your country, and enter the country command
again, following by your country code (e.g., tw for Taiwan).
Enterprise AP#country tw
Enterprise AP#
Setting the IP Address – By default, the AP is configured to obtain IP address
settings from a DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not available, the IP address
defaults to 192.168.1.1, which may not be compatible with your network. You will
therefore have to use the command line interface (CLI) to assign an IP address
that is compatible with your network.
Type configure to enter configuration mode, then type interface ethernet to
access the Ethernet interface-configuration mode.
Enterprise AP#configure
Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet
Enterprise AP(config-if)#
First type no ip dhcp to disable DHCP client mode. Then type ip address and the
ip-address netmask gateway, where ip-address is the AP’s IP address, netmask is
the network mask for the network, and gateway is the default gateway router.
Check with your system administrator to obtain an IP address that is compatible
with your network.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#no ip dhcp
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.254
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
36
Commissioning
Initial Setup through the CLI
After configuring the AP’s IP parameters, you can access the management
interface from anywhere within the attached network. The command line interface
can also be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network.
NOTE
Command examples shown later in this manual use the console prompt to Enterprise AP.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
37
Chapter 3 - Initial Configuration
3.3
Logging In
There are a few basic steps you need to complete to connect the AP to your
corporate network, and provide network access to wireless clients.
The AP can be managed by any computer using a web browser (Internet Explorer
5.0 or above, or Netscape 6.2 or above).
To Login:
Enter the default IP address http://192.168.1.1. Figure 3-1 is displayed.
Figure 3-1: Login
38
Enter the username admin.
The password is null, so leave blank and click LOGIN.
The home page (Figure 3-2) is displayed.
Commissioning
Logging In
Figure 3-2: Home Page
NOTE
For information on configuring a user name and password, see page 64.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
39
4
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
In This Chapter:
„ “Introduction” on page 42
„ “Advanced Configuration” on page 43
„ “SNMP” on page 75
„ “Radio Interface” on page 81
„ “Status Information” on page 116
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.1
Introduction
Before continuing with advanced configuration, first complete the initial
configuration steps described in Chapter 3 to set up an IP address for the Access
Point (AP) unit.
The AP unit can be managed by any computer using a web browser (Internet
Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape 6.2 or above). Enter the configured IP address
of the AP unit, or use the default address: http://192.168.1.1.
Enter the default user name admin in the Log In Dialog Box (Figure 3-1) and click
LOGIN. Select Advanced Setup from the menu on the home page. Figure 4-1 is
displayed.
Figure 4-1: Advanced Setup
The information in this chapter is organized to reflect the structure of the web
screens for easy reference. However, it is recommended that you configure a user
name and password as the first step under Administration to control management
access to this device (Section 4.2.10).
42
Operation
Advanced Configuration
4.2
Advanced Configuration
The Advanced Configuration pages include the following options.
Table 4-1: Menu
Menu
Description
Page
System
Configures basic administrative and client access
44
Identification
Specifies the host name
44
TCP / IP Settings
Configures the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and domain name servers
45
RADIUS
Configures the RADIUS server for wireless client authentication and accounting
48
SSH Settings
Configures Secure Shell management access
51
Authentication
Configures 802.1X client authentication, with an option for MAC address
authentication
53
Filter Control
Filters communications between wireless clients, access to the management
interface from wireless clients, and traffic matching specific Ethernet protocol
types
57
VLAN
Enables VLAN support and sets the management VLAN ID
60
WDS Settings
Not applicable for current release
62
AP Management
Configures access to management interfaces
62
Administration
Configures user name and password for management access; upgrades software
from local file, FTP or TFTP server; resets configuration settings to factory
defaults; and resets the AP
64
System Log
Controls logging of error messages; sets the system clock via SNTP server or
manual configuration
70
RSSI
Not applicable for current release
74
SNMP
Configures SNMP settings
75
Configures the IEEE 802.11g interface
81
Radio Settings
Configures common radio signal parameters and other settings for each VAP
interface
81
Security
Enables each VAP interface, sets the SSID, and configures wireless security
98
Displays information about the access point and wireless clients
116
AP Status
Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the wireless interface
116
Station Status
Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access point
118
Event Logs
Shows log messages stored in memory
120
Radio Interface G
Status
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
43
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
NOTE
This chapter may include references to features that are not applicable to the current release such as
Radio A, WDS Settings and RSSI.
4.2.1
System Identification
The system name can be left with the default setting. However, modifying this
parameter enables you to easily identify different devices in your network.
Figure 4-2: Identification
System Name – An alias for the AP, enabling the device to be uniquely identified
on the network. (Default: BlueSecure BSAP-1600; Range: 1-32 characters)
44
Operation
Advanced Configuration
4.2.1.0.1
CLI Commands for System Identification
Enter the global configuration mode, and use the system name command to
specify a new system name. Return to the Exec mode, and use the show system
command to display the changes to the system identification settings.
Enterprise AP#config
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(config)#system name R&D
Enterprise AP(config)#end
Enterprise AP#show system
135
142
135
149
System Information
==============================================================
Serial Number
: 0000000000
System Up time
: 2 days, 4 hours, 33 minutes, 38 seconds
System Name
: R&D
System Location
System Contact
: Contact
System Country Code
System Country Code
Radio G MAC Address
: 00-12-CF-12-34-95
IP Address
: 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 192.168.1.254
VLAN State
: DISABLED
Management VLAN ID(AP): 1
IAPP State
: ENABLED
DHCP Client
: DISABLED
HTTP Server
: ENABLED
HTTP Server Port
: 80
HTTP Session Timeout : 300
sec(s)
HTTPS Server
: ENABLED
HTTPS Server Port
: 443
Slot Status
: 802.11g only
Boot Rom Version
: v2.1.6
Software Version
: v4.3.3.8b02
SSH Server
: ENABLED
SSH Server Port
: 22
Telnet Server
: ENABLED
DHCP Relay
: DISABLED
==============================================================
Enterprise AP#
4.2.2
TCP / IP Settings
Configuring the AP with an IP address expands your ability to manage the AP. A
number of features depend on IP addressing to operate.
NOTE
You can use the web browser interface to access IP addressing only if the AP already has an IP
address that is accessible through your network.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
45
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
By default, the AP is automatically configured with IP settings from a Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. However, if you are not using a DHCP
server to configure IP addressing, use the CLI to manually configure the initial IP
values (see page 36). Once you have network access to the AP, you can use the
web browser interface to modify the initial IP configuration, if necessary.
NOTE
If there is no DHCP server on your network, or DHCP fails, the AP will automatically start up with a
default IP address of 192.168.1.1.
Figure 4-3: TCP/IP Settings
DHCP Client (Enable) – Select this option to obtain the IP settings for the AP from a
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server. The IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and Domain Name Server (DNS) address are dynamically
assigned to the AP by the network DHCP server. (Default: Enabled)
DHCP Client (Disable) – Select this option to manually configure a static address
for the AP.
„ IP Address: The IP address of the AP. Valid IP addresses consist of four
decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
„ Subnet Mask: The mask that identifies the host address bits used for routing
to specific subnets.
46
Operation
Advanced Configuration
„ Default Gateway: The default gateway is the IP address of the router for the
AP, which is used if the requested destination address is not on the local
subnet.
If you have management stations, DNS, RADIUS, or other network servers
located on another subnet, type the IP address of the default gateway router in
the text field provided. Otherwise, leave the address as all zeros (0.0.0.0).
„ Primary and Secondary DNS Address: The IP address of Domain Name Servers
on the network. A DNS maps numerical IP addresses to domain names and
can be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IP
addresses.
If you have one or more DNS servers located on the local network, type the IP
addresses in the text fields provided. Otherwise, leave the addresses as all
zeros (0.0.0.0).
4.2.2.0.1
CLI Commands for TCP/IP Settings
From the global configuration mode, enter the interface configuration mode with
the interface ethernet command. Use the ip dhcp command to enable the DHCP
client, or no ip dhcp to disable it. To manually configure an address, specify the
new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using the ip address
command. To specify DNS server addresses use the dns server command and use
the show interface ethernet command from the Exec mode to display the
current IP settings.
Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet
Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#no ip dhcp
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns primary-server 192.168.1.55
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns secondary-server 10.1.0.55
Enterprise AP(config)#end
Enterprise AP#show interface ethernet
Ethernet Interface Information
========================================
IP Address
: 192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 192.168.1.253
Primary DNS
: 192.168.1.55
Secondary DNS
: 10.1.0.55
Admin status
: Up
Operational status : Up
========================================
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
204
206
205
204
204
135
207
47
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.2.3
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is an authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to
RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a
database of user credentials for each user that requires access to the network.
A primary RADIUS server must be specified for the AP to implement IEEE 802.1X
network access control and WiFi Protected Access (WPA) wireless security. A
secondary RADIUS server may also be specified as a backup should the primary
server fail or become inaccessible.
In addition, the configured RADIUS server can also act as a RADIUS Accounting
server and receive user-session accounting information from the AP. RADIUS
Accounting can be used to provide valuable information on user activity in the
network.
NOTE
This manual assumes that you have already configured RADIUS server(s) to support the AP.
Configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this manul, refer to the
documentation provided with the RADIUS server software.
48
Operation
Advanced Configuration
Figure 4-4: RADIUS
MAC Address Format – MAC addresses can be specified in one of four formats,
using no delimiter, with a single dash delimiter, with multiple dash delimiters,
and with multiple colon delimiters.
VLAN ID Format – A VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can be assigned to
each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802.1X and a central
RADIUS server. The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
49
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
each user authorized to access the network. VLAN IDs can be entered as
hexadecimal numbers or as ASCII strings.
Primary Radius Server Setup – Configure the following settings to use RADIUS
authentication on the AP.
„ Radius Status: Enabling Radius Status allows the settings of RADIUS
authentication. (Default: Enable)
„ IP Address: Specifies the IP address or host name of the RADIUS server.
„ Port: The UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication
messages. (Range: 1024-65535; Default: 1812)
„ Key: A shared text string used to encrypt messages between the AP and the
RADIUS server. Be sure that the same text string is specified on the RADIUS
server. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
„ Timeout: Number of seconds the AP waits for a reply from the RADIUS server
before resending a request. (Range: 1-60 seconds; Default: 5)
„ Retransmit attempts: The number of times the AP tries to resend a request to
the RADIUS server before authentication fails. (Range: 1-30; Default: 3)
„ Accounting Port: The RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting
messages. (Range: 0 or 1024-65535; Default: 0, disabled)
„ Interim Update Timeout: The interval between transmitting accounting updates
to the RADIUS server. (Range: 60-86400; Default: 3600 seconds)
NOTE
For the Timeout and Retransmit attempts fields, accept the default values unless you experience
problems connecting to the RADIUS server over the network.
Secondary Radius Server Setup – Configure a secondary RADIUS server to provide
a backup in case the primary server fails. The AP uses the secondary server if the
primary server fails or becomes inaccessible. Once the AP switches over to the
secondary server, it periodically attempts to establish communication again with
primary server. If communication with the primary server is re-established, the
secondary server reverts to a backup role.
50
Operation
Advanced Configuration
4.2.3.0.1
CLI Commands for RADIUS
From the global configuration mode, use the radius-server address command to
specify the address of the primary or secondary RADIUS servers. (The following
example configures the settings for the primary RADIUS server.) Configure the
other parameters for the RADIUS server. Then use the show radius command
from the Exec mode to display the current settings for the primary and secondary
RADIUS servers.
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#radius-server
AP(config)#exit
AP#show radius
address 192.168.1.25
port 181
key green
timeout 10
retransmit 5
port-accounting 1813
timeout-interim 500
185
186
186
187
186
187
188
189
Radius Server Information
========================================
IP
: 192.168.1.25
Port
: 181
Key
: *****
Retransmit
: 5
Timeout
: 10
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Radius Secondary Server Information
========================================
IP
: 0.0.0.0
Port
: 1812
Key
: *****
Retransmit
: 3
Timeout
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Enterprise AP#
4.2.4
SSH Settings
Telnet is a remote management tool that can be used to configure the AP from
anywhere in the network. However, Telnet is not secure from hostile attacks. The
Secure Shell (SSH) can act as a secure replacement for Telnet. The SSH protocol
uses generated public keys to encrypt all data transfers passing between the AP
and SSH-enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling
over the network arrives unaltered. Clients can then securely use the local user
name and password for access authentication.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
51
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
SSH client software needs to be installed on the management station to access the
AP for management via the SSH protocol.
NOTE
„ The AP supports only SSH version 2.0.
„ After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host encryption keys. The
SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated.
Figure 4-5: SSH Settings
4.2.4.1
SSH Settings
Telnet Server Status – Enables or disables the Telnet server. (Default: Enabled)
SSH Server Status – Enables or disables the SSH server. (Default: Enabled)
SSH Server Port – Sets the UDP port for the SSH server. (Range: 1-65535;
Default: 22)
4.2.4.1.1
CLI Commands for SSH
To enable the SSH server, use the ip ssh-server enable command from the CLI
Ethernet interface configuration mode. To set the SSH server UDP port, use the ip
ssh-server port command. To view the current settings, use the show system
command from the CLI Exec mode (not shown in the following example).
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
52
AP(if-ethernet)#no ip telnet-server
AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server enable
AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server port 1124
AP(if-ethernet)#exit
AP(config)#
144
143
144
Operation
Advanced Configuration
4.2.5
Authentication
Wireless clients can be authenticated for network access by checking their MAC
address against the local database configured on the AP, or by using a database
configured on a central RADIUS server. Alternatively, authentication can be
implemented using the IEEE 802.1X network access control protocol.
A client’s MAC address provides relatively weak user authentication, since MAC
addresses can be easily captured and used by another station to break into the
network. Using 802.1X provides more robust user authentication using user
names and passwords or digital certificates. You can configure the access point to
use both MAC address and 802.1X authentication, with client station MAC
authentication occurring prior to IEEE 802.1X authentication. However, it is
better to choose one or the other, as appropriate.
Take note of the following points before configuring MAC address or 802.1X
authentication:
„ Use MAC address authentication for a small network with a limited number of
users. MAC addresses can be manually configured on the AP itself without the
need to set up a RADIUS server, but managing a large number of MAC
addresses across many APs is very cumbersome. A RADIUS server can be used
to centrally manage a larger database of user MAC addresses.
„ Use IEEE 802.1X authentication for networks with a larger number of users
and where security is the most important issue. When using 802.1X
authentication, a RADIUS server is required in the wired network to centrally
manage the credentials of the wireless clients. It also provides a mechanism
for enhanced network security using dynamic encryption key rotation or WiFi
Protected Access (WPA).
NOTE
If you configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1X, RADIUS MAC address
authentication is performed prior to 802.1X authentication. If RADIUS MAC authentication
succeeds, then 802.1X authentication is performed. If RADIUS MAC authentication fails, 802.1X
authentication is not performed.
„ The AP can also operate in a 802.1X supplicant mode. This enables the AP
itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a configured MD5 user
name and password. This prevents rogue APs from gaining access to the
network.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
53
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Figure 4-6: Authentication
MAC Authentication – You can configure a list of the MAC addresses for wireless
clients that are authorized to access the network. This provides a basic level of
authentication for wireless clients attempting to gain access to the network. A
database of authorized MAC addresses can be stored locally on the AP or remotely
on a central RADIUS server. (Default: Disabled)
„ Disabled: No checks are performed on an associating station’s MAC address.
„ Local MAC: The MAC address of the associating station is compared against
the local database stored on the AP. Use the Local MAC Authentication section
of this web page to set up the local database, and configure all APs in the
wireless network service area with the same MAC address database.
„ Radius MAC: The MAC address of the associating station is sent to a
configured RADIUS server for authentication. When using a RADIUS
authentication server for MAC address authentication, the server must first be
configured in the Radius window (see “RADIUS” on page 48). The database of
MAC addresses and filtering policy must be defined in the RADIUS server.
54
Operation
Advanced Configuration
NOTE
MAC addresses on the RADIUS server can be entered in four different formats (see “RADIUS”
on page 48).
802.1X Supplicant – The AP can also operate in a 802.1X supplicant mode. This
enables the access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a
configured MD5 user name and password. This prevents rogue APs from gaining
access to the network.
Local MAC Authentication – Configures the local MAC authentication database.
The MAC database provides a mechanism to take certain actions based on a
wireless client’s MAC address. The MAC list can be configured to allow or deny
network access to specific clients.
„ System Default: Specifies a default action for all unknown MAC addresses
(that is, those not listed in the local MAC database).
‘ Deny: Blocks access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local
database as “Allow.”
‘ Allow: Permits access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local
database as “Deny.”
„ MAC Authentication Settings: Enters specified MAC addresses and permissions
into the local MAC database.
‘ MAC Address: Physical address of a client. Enter six pairs of hexadecimal
digits separated by hyphens; for example, 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.
‘ Permission: Select Allow to permit access or Deny to block access. If Delete
is selected, the specified MAC address entry is removed from the database.
‘ Update: Enters the specified MAC address and permission setting into the
local database.
„ MAC Authentication Table: Displays current entries in the local MAC database.
4.2.5.0.1
CLI Commands for Local MAC Authentication
Use the mac-authentication server command from the global configuration
mode to enable local MAC authentication. Use the mac-authentication
session-timeout command to set the authentication interval to enable web-based
authentication for service billing. Set the default action for MAC addresses not in
the local table using the address filter default command, then enter MAC
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
55
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
addresses in the local table using the address filter entry command. To remove
an entry from the table, use the address filter delete command. To display the
current settings, use the show authentication command from the Exec mode.
Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication server local
Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication session-timeout 5
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter default denied
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter entry
00-70-50-cc-99-1a denied
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter entry
00-70-50-cc-99-1b allowed
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter entry
00-70-50-cc-99-1c allowed
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter delete
00-70-50-cc-99-1c
Enterprise AP(config)#exit
Enterprise AP#show authentication
196
196
194
195
195
193
Authentication Information
===========================================================
MAC Authentication Server
: LOCAL
MAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min
802.1x supplicant
: DISABLED
802.1x supplicant user
: EMPTY
802.1x supplicant password
: EMPTY
Address Filtering
: DENIED
System Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.
Filter Table
MAC Address
Status
-------------------------00-70-50-cc-99-1a
DENIED
00-70-50-cc-99-1b
ALLOWED
=========================================================
Enterprise AP#
4.2.5.0.2
CLI Commands for RADIUS MAC Authentication
Use the mac-authentication server command from the global configuration
mode to enable remote MAC authentication. Set the timeout value for
re-authentication using the mac- authentication session-timeout command. Be
sure to also configure connection settings for the RADIUS server (not shown in the
56
Operation
Advanced Configuration
following example). To display the current settings, use the show authentication
command from the Exec mode.
Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication server remote
Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication
session-timeout 300
Enterprise AP(config)#exit
Enterprise AP#show authentication
196
196
193
Authentication Information
===========================================================
MAC Authentication Server
: REMOTE
MAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 300 min
802.1x supplicant
: DISABLED
802.1x supplicant user
: EMPTY
802.1x supplicant password
: EMPTY
Address Filtering
: DENIED
System Default : DENY addresses not found in filter table.
Filter Table
MAC Address
Status
-------------------------00-70-50-cc-99-1a
DENIED
00-70-50-cc-99-1b
ALLOWED
=========================================================
Enterprise AP#
4.2.5.0.3
CLI Command for 802.1x Supplicant
To configure the AP to operate as a 802.1X supplicant, first use the 802.1X
supplicant user command to set a user name and password for the AP, then use
the 802.1X supplicant command to enable the feature. To display the current
settings, use the show authentication command from the Exec mode (not shown
in the following example)
Enterprise AP(config)#802.1X supplicant user secureAP dot1xpass
Enterprise AP(config)#802.1X supplicant
Enterprise AP(config)#
4.2.6
192
192
Filter Control
The AP can employ network traffic frame filtering to control access to network
resources and increase security. You can prevent communications between
wireless clients and prevent AP management from wireless clients. You can also
block specific Ethernet traffic from being forwarded by the AP.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
57
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Figure 4-7: Filter Control
Inter Client STAs Communication Filter – Sets the global mode for
wireless-to-wireless communications between clients associated to Virtual AP
(VAP) interfaces on the AP. (Default: Disabled)
„ Disabled: All clients can communicate with each other through the access
point.
„ Prevent Intra VAP client communication: When enabled, clients associated with
a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with each
other. Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP
interfaces.
„ Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client communication: When enabled, clients cannot
establish wireless communications with any other client, either those
associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface.
AP Management Filter – Controls management access to the AP from wireless
clients. Management interfaces include the web, Telnet, or SNMP.
(Default: Enabled)
58
Operation
Advanced Configuration
„ Disabled: Allows management access from wireless clients.
„ Enabled: Blocks management access from wireless clients.
Uplink Port MAC Address Filtering Status – Prevents traffic with specified source
MAC addresses from being forwarded to wireless clients through the AP. You can
add a maximum of four MAC addresses to the filter table. (Default: Disabled)
„ MAC Address: Specifies a MAC address to filter, in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
„ Permission: Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table.
Ethernet Type Filter – Controls checks on the Ethernet type of all incoming and
outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table. (Default: Disabled)
„ Disabled: AP does not filter Ethernet protocol types.
„ Enabled: AP filters Ethernet protocol types based on the configuration of
protocol types in the filter table. If the status of a protocol is set to ON, the
protocol is filtered from the AP.
NOTE
Ethernet protocol types not listed in the filtering table are always forwarded by the AP.
Ethernet Type Filter – Enables or disables Ethernet filtering on the port. (Default:
Disabled)
4.2.6.0.1
CLI Commands for Filtering
Use the filter ap-manage command to restrict management access from wireless
clients. To configure Ethernet protocol filtering, use the filter ethernet-type
enable command to enable filtering and the filter ethernet-type protocol
command to define the protocols that you want to filter. To remove an entry from
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
59
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
the table, use the address filter delete command. To display the current settings,
use the show filters command from the Exec mode.
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP(config)#filter
AP(config)#filter
AP(config)#filter
AP(config)#filter
AP(config)#filter
AP(config)#exit
AP#show filters
ap-manage
uplink enable
uplink add 00-12-34-56-78-9a
ethernet-type enable
ethernet-type protocol ARP
198
198
199
199
200
201
Protocol Filter Information
=========================================================
Local AP
:ENABLED
AP Management
:ENABLED
Ethernet Type Filter :ENABLED
Enabled Protocol Filters
--------------------------------------------------------Protocol: ARP
ISO: 0x0806
=========================================================
Enterprise AP#
4.2.7
VLAN
The AP can employ VLAN tagging support to control access to network resources
and increase security. VLANs separate traffic passing between the AP, associated
clients, and the wired network. There can be a VLAN assigned to each associated
client, a default VLAN for each VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface, and a
management VLAN for the AP.
Note the following points about the AP’s VLAN support:
„ The management VLAN is for managing the AP through remote management
tools, such as the web interface, SSH, SNMP, or Telnet. The AP only accepts
management traffic that is tagged with the specified management VLAN ID.
„ All wireless clients associated to the AP are assigned to a VLAN. If IEEE
802.1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients, specific VLAN IDs can be
configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client. If a client is not
assigned to a specific VLAN or if 802.1X is not used, the client is assigned to
the default VLAN for the VAP interface with which it is associated. The AP only
allows traffic tagged with assigned VLAN IDs or default VLAN IDs to access
clients associated on each VAP interface.
„ When VLAN support is enabled on the AP, traffic passed to the wired network
is tagged with the appropriate VLAN ID, either an assigned client VLAN ID,
default VLAN ID, or the management VLAN ID. Traffic received from the wired
60
Operation
Advanced Configuration
network must also be tagged with one of these known VLAN IDs. Received
traffic that has an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN tag is dropped.
„ When VLAN support is disabled, the AP does not tag traffic passed to the wired
network and ignores the VLAN tags on any received frames.
NOTE
Before enabling VLAN tagging on the AP, be sure to configure the backhaul system to support
tagged VLAN frames from the AP’s management VLAN ID, default VLAN IDs, and other client
VLAN IDs. Otherwise, connectivity to the AP will be lost when you enable the VLAN feature.
Using IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server, up to 64 VLAN IDs can be
mapped to specific wireless clients, allowing users to remain within the same
VLAN as they move around a campus site. This feature can also be used to control
access to network resources from clients, thereby improving security.
A VLAN ID (1-4094) can be assigned to a client after successful IEEE 802.1X
authentication. The client VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for
each user authorized to access the network. If a client does not have a configured
VLAN ID on the RADIUS server, the AP assigns the client to the configured default
VLAN ID for the VAP interface.
NOTE
When using IEEE 802.1X to dynamically assign VLAN IDs, the AP must have 802.1X authentication
enabled and a RADIUS server configured. Wireless clients must also support 802.1X client
software.
When setting up VLAN IDs for each user on the RADIUS server, be sure to use the
RADIUS attributes and values as indicated Table 4-2.
Table 4-2: RADIUS Attributes
Number
RADIUS Attribute
Value
64
Tunnel-Type
VLAN (13)
65
Tunnel-Medium-Type
802
81
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID
VLANID
(1 to 4094 as hexadecimal or string)
VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server can be entered as hexadecimal digits or a string
(see “radius-server vlan-format” on page 189).
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
61
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
NOTE
The specific configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this manual. Refer to
the documentation provided with the RADIUS server software.
Figure 4-8: VLAN Configuration
VLAN Classification – Enables or disables VLAN tagging support on the AP.
Native VLAN ID – The VLAN ID that traffic must have to be able to manage the AP.
(Range 1-4094; Default: 1)
4.2.8
WDS Settings
WDS Settings is not applicable for the current release.
4.2.9
AP Management
The Web, Telnet, and SNMP management interfaces are enabled and open to all IP
addresses by default. To provide more security for management access to the AP,
specific interfaces can be disabled and management restricted to a single IP
address or a limited range of IP addresses.
Once you specify an IP address or range of addresses, access to management
interfaces is restricted to the specified addresses. If anyone tries to access a
management interface from an unauthorized address, the AP will reject the
connection.
62
Operation
Advanced Configuration
Figure 4-9: AP Management
UI Management – Enables or disables management access through Telnet, the
Web (HTTP), or SNMP interfaces. (Default: Enabled)
NOTE
Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management
settings.
IP Management – Restricts management access to Telnet, Web, and SNMP
interfaces to specified IP addresses. (Default: Any IP)
„ Any IP: Indicates that any IP address is allowed management access.
„ Single IP: Specifies a single IP address that is allowed management access.
„ Multiple IP: Specifies an address range as defined by the entered IP address
and subnet mask. For example, IP address 192.168.1.6 and subnet mask
255.255.255.0, defines all IP addresses from 192.168.1.6 to 192.168.1.254.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
63
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.2.9.0.1
CLI Commands for AP Management features.
Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtip multiple 192.168.1.6 255.255.255.0
Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtui SNMP enable
147
148
4.2.10 Administration
4.2.10.1
Changing the Password
Management access to the web and CLI interface on the AP is controlled through a
single user name and password. You can also gain additional access security by
using control filters (see “Filter Control” on page 57).
To protect access to the management interface, you need to change the default
user name and password as soon as possible. If the user name and password are
not changed, anyone having access to the AP can compromise AP and network
security. Once a new administrator has been configured, you can delete the
default admin user name from the system.
Figure 4-10: Administration
Username – The name of the user. The default name is admin. (Length: 3-16
characters, case sensitive)
New Password – The password for management access. (Length: 3-16 characters,
case sensitive)
Confirm New Password – Enter the password again for verification.
4.2.10.1.1
CLI Commands for Changing User Name and Password
Use the username and password commands from the CLI configuration mode.
Enterprise AP(config)#username bob
Enterprise AP(config)#password admin
Enterprise AP#
4.2.10.2
142
143
Setting the Timeout Interval
You can set the timeout interval for web access to the unit, after which the user
will have to re-enter the username and password.
64
Operation
Advanced Configuration
Figure 4-11: Session Timeout for WEB
Session Timeout for WEB: Sets the time limit for an idle web interface session.
(Range: 0-1800 seconds; Default: 300 seconds; 0 is disabled)
4.2.10.2.1
CLI Command for the Web Session Timeout
Use the ip http session-timeout command from the CLI configuration mode.
Enterprise AP(config)#ip http session-timeout 0
Enterprise AP(config)#
4.2.10.3
145
Upgrading Firmware
You can upgrade new AP software from a local file on the management
workstation, or from an FTP or TFTP server. New software may be provided
periodically from your distributor.
After upgrading new software, you must reboot the AP to implement the new code.
Until a reboot occurs, the AP will continue to run the software it was using before
the upgrade started. Also note that new software that is incompatible with the
current configuration automatically restores the AP to the factory default settings
when first activated after a reboot.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
65
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Figure 4-12: Firmware Upgrade
Before upgrading new software, verify that the AP is connected to the network and
has been configured with a compatible IP address and subnet mask.
If you need to download from an FTP or TFTP server, take the following additional
steps:
„ Obtain the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server where the AP software is
stored.
„ If upgrading from an FTP server, be sure that you have an account configured
on the server with a user name and password.
„ If VLANs are configured on the AP, determine the VLAN ID with which the FTP
or TFTP server is associated, and then configure the management station, or
the network port to which it is attached, with the same VLAN ID. If you are
66
Operation
Advanced Configuration
managing the AP from a wireless client, the VLAN ID for the wireless client
must be configured on a RADIUS server.
Current version – Version number of runtime code.
Firmware Upgrade Local – Downloads an operation code image file from the web
management station to the AP using HTTP. Use the Browse button to locate the
image file locally on the management station and click Start Upgrade to proceed.
„ New firmware file: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new
firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the
file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names is
32 characters for files on the access point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”,
“-”, “_”)
Firmware Upgrade Remote – Downloads an operation code image file from a
specified remote FTP or TFTP server. After filling in the following fields, click Start
Upgrade to proceed.
„ New firmware file: Specifies the name of the code file on the server. The new
firmware file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the
file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on
the FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access
point. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
„ IP Address: IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server.
„ Username: The user ID used for login on an FTP server.
„ Password: The password used for login on an FTP server.
Configuration File Backup/Restore – Uploads the current AP configuration file to a
specified remote FTP or TFTP server. A configuration file can also be downloaded
to the AP to restore a specific configuration.
„ Export/Import: Select Export to upload a file to an FTP/TFTP server. Select
Import to download a file from an FTP/TFTP server.
„ Config file: Specifies the name of the configuration file, which must always be
"syscfg." A path on the server can be specified using “/” in the name, providing
the path already exists; for example, “myfolder/syscfg.” Other than to indicate
a path, the file name must not contain any slashes (\ or /), the leading letter
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
67
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
cannot be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the
FTP/TFTP server is 255 characters. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
„ IP Address: IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server.
„ Username: The user ID used for login on an FTP server.
„ Password: The password used for login on an FTP server.
Restore Factory Settings – Click the Restore button to reset the configuration
settings for the AP to the factory defaults and reboot the system. Note that all user
configured information will be lost. You will have to re-enter the default user name
(admin) to re-gain management access to this device.
Reboot Access Point – Click the Reset button to reboot the system.
NOTE
If you have upgraded system software, then you must reboot the AP to implement the new
operation code. New software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically
restores the AP to default values when first activated after a reboot.
Upon uploading a new configuration file you will be prompted to either restore
factory settings, or reboot the unit.
Figure 4-13: New Configuration Warning
4.2.10.3.1
CLI Commands for Downloading Software from a TFTP Server
Use the copy tftp file command from the Exec mode and then specify the file
type, name, and IP address of the TFTP server. When the download is complete,
68
Operation
Advanced Configuration
the dir command can be used to check that the new file is present in the AP file
system. To run the new software, use the reset board command to reboot the AP.
Enterprise AP#copy tftp file
1. Application image
2. Config file
3. Boot block image
Select the type of download<1,2,3>:
TFTP Source file name:img.bin
TFTP Server IP:192.168.1.19
Enterprise AP#dir
File Name
-------------------------dflt-img.bin
img.bin
syscfg
syscfg_bak
181
[1]:1
183
Type
---2
File Size
----------1319939
1629577
17776
17776
262144 byte(s) available
Enterprise AP#reset board
Reboot system now? : y
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
136
69
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.2.11 System Log
The AP can be configured to send event and error messages to a System Log
Server. The system clock can also be synchronized with a time server, so that all
the messages sent to the Syslog server are stamped with the correct time and
date.
Figure 4-14: System Log
4.2.11.1
Enabling System Logging
The AP supports a logging process that can control error messages saved to
memory or sent to a Syslog server. The logged messages serve as a valuable tool
for isolating AP and network problems.
System Log Setup – Enables the logging of error messages. (Default: Disable)
Server (1-4) – Enables the sending of log messages to a Syslog server host. Up to
four Syslog servers are supported on the AP. (Default: Disable)
Server Name/IP – The IP address or name of a Syslog server. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
UDP Port – The UDP port used by a Syslog server. (Range: 514 or 11024-65535;
Default: 514)
Logging Console – Enables the logging of error messages to the console.
(Default: Disable)
70
Operation
Advanced Configuration
Logging Level – Sets the minimum severity level for event logging.
(Default: Informational)
The system allows you to limit the messages that are logged by specifying a
minimum severity level. Table 4-3 lists the error message levels from the most
severe (Emergency) to least severe (Debug). The message levels that are logged
include the specified minimum level up to the Emergency level.
Table 4-3: Error Message Levels
Error Level
Description
Emergency
System unusable
Alerts
Immediate action needed
Critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)
Error
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
Warning
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
Notice
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
Informational
Informational messages only
Debug
Debugging messages
NOTE
The AP error log can be viewed using the Event Logs window in the Status section ( page 120).
The Event Logs window displays the last 128 messages logged in chronological order, from the
newest to the oldest. Log messages saved in the AP’s memory are erased when the device is
rebooted.
Logging Facility Type – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC
3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch.
However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store
messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23; Default: 16)
4.2.11.1.1
CLI Commands for System Logging
To enable logging on the AP, use the logging on command from the global
configuration mode. The logging level command sets the minimum level of
message to log. Use the logging console command to enable logging to the
console. Use the logging host command to specify up to four Syslog servers. The
CLI also allows the logging facility-type command to set the facility-type number
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
71
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
to use on the Syslog server. To view the current logging settings, use the show
logging command.
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP(config)#logging
AP(config)#logging
AP(config)#logging
AP(config)#logging
AP(config)#logging
AP(config)#logging
AP(config)#exit
AP#show logging
on
level alert
console
host 1 IP 10.1.0.3 514
host 1 Port 514
facility-type 19
157
158
158
157
157
159
160
Logging Information
============================================
Syslog State
: Enabled
Logging Console State
: Enabled
Logging Level
: Alert
Logging Facility Type
: 19
Servers
1: 10.1.0.3, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled
2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
=============================================
Enterprise AP#
4.2.11.2
Configuring SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the AP to set its internal clock based
on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an accurate
time on the AP enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for
event entries. If the clock is not set, the AP will only record the time from the
factory default set at the last bootup.
The AP acts as an SNTP client, periodically sending time synchronization requests
to specific time servers. You can configure up to two time server IP addresses. The
AP will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.
SNTP Server – Configures the AP to operate as an SNTP client. When enabled, at
least one time server IP address must be specified.
„ Primary Server: The IP address of an SNTP or NTP time server that the AP
attempts to poll for a time update.
„ Secondary Server: The IP address of a secondary SNTP or NTP time server. The
AP first attempts to update the time from the primary server; if this fails it
attempts an update from the secondary server.
72
Operation
Advanced Configuration
NOTE
The AP also allows you to disable SNTP and set the system clock manually.
Set Time Zone – SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly
Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian,
zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you
must indicate the number of hours your time zone is located before (east) or after
(west) UTC.
Enable Daylight Saving – The AP provides a way to automatically adjust the
system clock for Daylight Savings Time changes. To use this feature you must
define the month and date to begin and to end the change from standard time.
During this period the system clock is set back by one hour.
4.2.11.2.1
CLI Commands for SNTP
To enable SNTP support on the AP, from the global configuration mode specify
SNTP server IP addresses using the sntp-server ip command, then use the
sntp-server enable command to enable the service. Use the sntp-server
timezone command to set the time zone for your location, and the sntp-server
daylight-saving command to set daylight savings. To view the current SNTP
settings, use the show sntp command.
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server ip 1 10.1.0.19
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server enable
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server timezone +8
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server daylight-saving
Enter Daylight saving from which month<1-12>: 3
and which day<1-31>: 31
Enter Daylight saving end to which month<1-12>: 10
and which day<1-31>: 31
Enterprise AP(config)#exit
Enterprise AP#show sntp
162
163
164
164
165
SNTP Information
=========================================================
Service State
: Enabled
SNTP (server 1) IP
: 10.1.0.19
SNTP (server 2) IP
: 192.43.244.18
Current Time
: 19 : 35, Oct 10th, 2003
Time Zone
: +8 (TAIPEI, BEIJING)
Daylight Saving
: Enabled, from Mar, 31st to Oct, 31st
=========================================================
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
73
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.2.11.2.2
CLI Commands for the System Clock
The following example shows how to manually set the system time when SNTP
server support is disabled on the AP.
Enterprise AP(config)#no sntp-server enable
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server date-time
Enter Year<1970-2100>: 2003
Enter Month<1-12>: 10
Enter Day<1-31>: 10
Enter Hour<0-23>: 18
Enter Min<0-59>: 35
Enterprise AP(config)#
163
163
4.2.12 RSSI
RSSI is not applicable for the current release.
74
Operation
SNMP
4.3
SNMP
You can use a network management application such as HP’s OpenView to
manage the AP via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) from a
network management station. To implement SNMP management, the AP must
have an IP address and subnet mask, configured either manually or dynamically.
Once an IP address has been configured, appropriate SNMP communities and
trap receivers should be configured.
Community names are used to control management access to SNMP stations, as
well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the AP. To
communicate with the AP, a management station must first submit a valid
community name for authentication. You therefore need to assign community
names to specified users or user groups and set the access level.
Figure 4-15: SNMP
SNMP – Enables or disables SNMP management access and also enables the AP to
send SNMP traps (notifications). (Default: Disable)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
75
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Location – A text string that describes the system location. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
Contact – A text string that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255
characters)
Community Name (Read Only) – Defines the SNMP community access string that
has read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve
MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive; Default: public)
Community Name (Read/Write) – Defines the SNMP community access string that
has read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve
and modify MIB objects. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive;
Default: private)
Trap Destination (1 to 4) – Enables recipients (up to four) of SNMP notifications.
„ Trap Destination IP Address – Specifies the recipient of SNMP notifications.
Enter the IP address or the host name. (Host Name: 1 to 63 characters, case
sensitive)
„ Trap Destination Community Name – The community string sent with the
notification operation. (Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive;
Default: public)
Engine ID – Sets the engine identifier for the SNMPv3 agent that resides on the AP.
This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The engine ID
is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for
authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets. A default engine ID is
automatically generated that is unique to the AP. (Range: 10 to 64 hexadecimal
characters)
NOTE
If the local engine ID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. All existing users will
need to be re-configured.
76
Operation
SNMP
Figure 4-16: Trap Configuration
Trap Configuration – Allows selection of specific SNMP notifications to send. The
following items are available:
„ sysSystemUp - The AP is up and running.
„ sysSystemDown - The AP is about to shutdown and reboot.
„ sysRadiusServerChanged - The AP has changed from the primary RADIUS
server to the secondary, or from the secondary to the primary.
„ sysConfigFileVersionChanged - The AP’s configuration file has been changed.
„ dot11StationAssociation - A client station has successfully associated with the
AP.
„ dot11StationReAssociation - A client station has successfully re-associated
with the AP.
„ dot11StationAuthentication - A client station has been successfully
authenticated.
„ dot11StationRequestFail - A client station has failed association,
re-association, or authentication.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
77
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
„ dot11InterfaceBFail - The 802.11b interface has failed.
„ dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its
MAC address with the RADIUS server.
„ dot1xMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed MAC address
authentication with the RADIUS server.
„ dot1xAuthNotInitiated - A client station did not initiate 802.1X authentication.
„ dot1xAuthSuccess - A 802.1X client station has been successfully
authenticated by the RADIUS server.
„ dot1xAuthFail - A 802.1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication.
„ dot1xSuppAuthenticated - A supplicant station has been successfully
authenticated by the RADIUS server
„ localMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its
MAC address with the local database on the AP.
„ localMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed authentication with the local
MAC address database on the AP.
„ iappStationRoamedFrom - A client station has roamed from another AP
(identified by its IP address).
„ iappStationRoamedTo - A client station has roamed to another AP (identified by
its IP address).
„ iappContextDataSent - A client station’s Context Data has been sent to another
AP with which the station has associated.
„ sntpServerFail - The AP has failed to set the time from the configured SNTP
server.
„ dot11WirelessStationDeauthenticate - A client station has de-authenticated
from the network.
„ dot11StationDisassociate - A client station no longer associates with the
network.
78
Operation
SNMP
„ dot11StationAuthenticateFail - A client station has tried and failed to
authenticate to the network.
„ Enable All Traps - Click the button to enable all the available traps.
„ Disable All Traps - Click the button to disable all the available traps.
4.3.0.0.1
CLI Commands for SNMP and Trap Configuration
Use the snmp-server enable server command from the global configuration mode
to enable the SNMP agent. Use the snmp-server location and snmp-server
contact commands to indicate the physical location of the wi and define a system
contact. To set the read-only and read/write community names, use the
snmp-server community command. Use the snmp-server host command to
define a trap receiver host and the snmp-server trap command to enable or
disable specific traps.
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#snmp-server
AP(config)#
enable server
community alpha rw
community beta ro
location WC-19
contact Paul
host 192.168.1.9 alpha
trap dot11StationAssociation
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
170
168
169
169
170
171
79
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
To view the current SNMP settings, use the show snmp command.
179
Enterprise AP#show snmp
SNMP Information
==============================================
Service State
: Enable
Community (ro)
: *****
Community (rw)
: *****
Location
: WC-19
Contact
: Paul
EngineId
:80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:2e:62:00:00:00:18
EngineBoots:1
Trap Destinations:
1:
192.168.1.9,
2:
0.0.0.0,
3:
0.0.0.0,
4:
0.0.0.0,
Community:
Community:
Community:
Community:
dot11InterfaceAGFail
dot11StationAssociation
dot11StationReAssociation
dot1xAuthFail
dot1xAuthSuccess
dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess
iappStationRoamedFrom
localMacAddrAuthFail
iappContextDataSent
wirelessExternalAntenna
dot11InterfaceGFail
pppLogonFail
configFileVersionChanged
systemDown
*****,
*****,
*****,
*****,
State:
State:
State:
State:
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
dot11InterfaceBFail
Enabled dot11StationAuthentication
Enabled
dot11StationRequestFail
Enabled
dot1xAuthNotInitiated
Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthFail
Enabled
iappContextDataSent
Enabled
iappStationRoamedTo
Enabled
localMacAddrAuthSuccess
Enabled
dot1XSuppAuthenticated
Enabled
dot11InterfaceAFail
Enabled
Enabled
sntpServerFail
Enabled
radiusServerChanged
Enabled
systemUp
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
=============================================
Enterprise AP#
80
Operation
Radio Interface
4.4
Radio Interface
The 802.11g interface includes configuration options for radio signal
characteristics and wireless security features. The configuration options are
nearly identical, and are therefore both covered in this section of the manual.
NOTE
802.11g is backward compatible with 802.11b. The 802.11g interface is configured independently
under the Radio Interface G: 802.11b/g web pages.
The radio supports up to four virtual AP (VAP) interfaces numbered 0 to 3. Each
VAP functions as a separate AP, and can be configured with its own Service Set
Identification (SSID) and security settings. However, most radio signal parameters
apply to all four VAP interfaces.
The VAPs function similar to a VLAN, with each VAP mapped to its own VLAN ID.
Traffic to specific VAPs can be segregated based on user groups or application
traffic. Each VAP can have up to 64 wireless clients, whereby the clients associate
with these VAPs the same as they would with a physical AP.
NOTE
The radio channel settings for the AP are limited by local regulations, which determine the number
of channels that are available. Refer to “Specifications” on page 4 for additional information on
the maximum number channels available.
4.4.1
Radio Settings G (802.11g)
The IEEE 802.11g standard operates within the 2.4 GHz band at up to 54 Mbps.
Also note that because the IEEE 802.11g standard is an extension of the IEEE
802.11b standard, it allows clients with 802.11b wireless network cards to
associate to an 802.11g access point.
First configure the radio settings that apply to the individual VAPs (Virtual Access
Point) and the common radio settings that apply to all of the 802.11g interfaces.
After you have configured the radio settings, go to the Security page under the
802.g Interface (see “Security” on page 4-98.), enable the radio service for any of
the VAP interfaces, and then set an SSID to identify the wireless network service
provided by each VAP. Remember that only clients with the same SSID can
associate with a VAP.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
81
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
NOTE
You must first enable VAP interface 0 before the other interfaces can be enabled.
For information on configuring 802.11g settings, refer to the following sections:
„ “Configuring VAP Radio Settings” on page 82
„ “Configuring Rogue AP Detection” on page 84
„ “Configuring WiFi Multimedia” on page 92
4.4.1.1
Configuring VAP Radio Settings
To configure VAP radio settings, select the Radio Settings page.
Figure 4-17: Radio Settings Page
82
Operation
Radio Interface
Figure 4-18: Radio Settings
Default VLAN ID – The VLAN ID assigned to wireless clients associated to the VAP
interface that are not assigned to a specific VLAN by RADIUS server configuration.
(Default: 1)
Closed System – When enabled, the VAP interface does not include its SSID in
beacon messages. Nor does it respond to probe requests from clients that do not
include a fixed SSID. (Default: Disable)
Authentication Timeout Interval – The time within which the client should finish
authentication before authentication times out. (Range: 5-60 minutes; Default: 60
minutes)
Association Timeout Interval – The idle time interval (when no frames are sent)
after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface. (Range: 5-60 minutes;
Default: 30 minutes)
WPA2 PMKSA Life Time – WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by
retaining keys and other security settings in a cache for each VAP. In this way,
when clients roam back into a VAP they had previously been using,
re-authentication is not required. When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it
receives a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) that is used to generate the other keys used
for unicast data encryption. This key and other client information form a client
Security Association (SA) that the VAP holds in a cache. When the lifetime expires,
the security association and keys are deleted from the cache. If the client returns
to an access point after the association has been deleted, it will require full
re-authentication. (Range: 1-1440 minutes; Default: 720 minutes)
4.4.1.1.1
CLI Commands for the Configuring the VAPs
From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless g command to
access the 802.11g radio interface. From the 802.11g interface mode, you can
access radio settings that apply to all VAP interfaces. To access a specific VAP
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
83
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
interface (numbered 0 to 3), use the vap command. You can configure a name for
each interface using the description command. You can also use the
closed-system command to stop sending the SSID in beacon messages. Set any
other VAP parameters and radio setting as required before enabling the VAP
interface (with the no shutdown command). To view the current 802.11g radio
settings for the VAP interface, use the show interface wireless g [0-3] command
as shown on page 210.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
interval 30
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
interval 20
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
Enterprise AP(if-wireless
4.4.1.2
g)#vap 0
g: VAP[0])#description RD-AP#3
g: VAP[0])#vlan-id 1
g: VAP[0])#closed-system
g: VAP[0])#authentication-timeout-
210
219
243
220
221
g: VAP[0])#association-timeoutg: VAP[0])#max-association 32
g: VAP[0])#pmksa-lifetime 900
g: VAP[0])#
221
220
236
Configuring Rogue AP Detection
To configure Rouge AP detection, select the Radio Settings page, and scroll down
to the Rouge AP section.
Figure 4-19: Rouge AP Section of Radio Settings page
Rogue AP – A “rogue AP” is either an AP that is not authorized to participate in the
wireless network, or an AP that does not have the correct security configuration.
Rogue APs can allow unauthorized access to the network, or fool client stations
into mistakenly associating with them and thereby blocking access to network
resources.
The AP can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other
APs within range. A database of nearby APs is maintained where any rogue APs
can be identified. During a scan, Syslog messages (see “Enabling System Logging”
84
Operation
Radio Interface
on page 70) are sent for each AP detected. Rogue APs can be identified by
unknown BSSID (MAC address) or SSID configuration.
„ AP Detection – Enables the periodic scanning for other APs. (Default: Disable)
„ AP Scan Interval – Sets the time between each rogue AP scan. (Range: 30
-10080 minutes; Default: 720 minutes)
„ AP Scan Duration – Sets the length of time for each rogue AP scan. A long scan
duration time will detect more access points in the area, but causes more
disruption to client access. (Range: 100 -1000 milliseconds; Default: 350
milliseconds)
„ Rogue AP Authenticate – Enables or disables RADIUS authentication. Enabling
RADIUS Authentication allows the AP to discover rogue APs. With RADIUS
authentication enabled, the access point checks the MAC address/ Basic
Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of each access point that it finds against a
RADIUS server to determine whether the access point is allowed. With RADIUS
authentication disabled, the access point can detect its neighboring APs only;
it cannot identify whether the APs are allowed or are rogues. If you enable
RADIUS authentication, you must configure a RADIUS server for this AP (see
“RADIUS” on page 4-48.).
„ Scan AP Now – Starts an immediate rogue AP scan on the radio interface.
(Default: Disable)
NOTE
While the AP scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the
access point. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a
reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.
4.4.1.2.1
CLI Commands for Rogue AP Detection
From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless command to
access the 802.11g radio interface. From the wireless interface mode, use the
rogue-ap enable command to enable rogue AP detection. Set the duration and
interval times with the rogue-ap duration and rogue-ap interval commands. If
required, start an immediate scan using the rogue-ap scan command. To view the
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
85
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
database of detected access points, use the show rogue-ap command from the
Exec level.
Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g
210
Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.
226
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap enable
configure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected.
227
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap duration 200
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap interval 120
228
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap scan
228
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogueApDetect Completed (Radio G) : 5 APs detected
rogueAPDetect (Radio G): refreshing ap database now
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#exit
Enterprise AP#show rogue-ap
229
802.11g Channel : Rogue AP Status
AP Address(BSSID)
SSID
Channel(MHz) RSSI
=======================================================
00-04-e2-2a-37-23
WLAN1AP
11(2462 MHz)
17
00-04-e2-2a-37-3d
ANY
7(2442 MHz)
42
00-04-e2-2a-37-49
WLAN1AP
9(2452 MHz)
42
00-90-d1-08-9d-a7
WLAN1AP
1(2412 MHz)
12
00-30-f1-fb-31-f4
WLAN
6(2437 MHz)
16
Enterprise AP#
To configure the remaining 802.11g radio settings, select the Radio Settings
page.
86
Operation
Radio Interface
Figure 4-20: Radio Setting Configuration
Radio Channel – The radio channel that the AP uses to communicate with wireless
clients. When multiple APs are deployed in the same area, set the channel on
neighboring access points at least four channels apart to avoid interference with
each other. This means that you can deploy up to three APs in the same area. (In
the United States you should use channels 1, 6 and 11. In most of Europe you
can also use channels 2, 7 and 12, or 3, 8 and 13).
Also note that the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as
that used by the access point to which it is linked. In Turbo Mode (Super G
enabled) only channel 6 should be used. (Default: Channel 6))
Table 4-4: Channels Assignment
Channel NumberV
Frequency (GHz)
2.412
2.417
2.422
2.427
2.432
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
87
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Table 4-4: Channels Assignment
Channel NumberV
Frequency (GHz)
2.437
2.442
2.447
2.452
10
2.457
11
2.462
12
2.467
13
2.472
14
2.482
Auto Channel Select – Enables the AP to automatically select an unoccupied radio
channel. (Default: Enabled)
NOTE
Check your country’s regulations to see if Auto Channel can be disabled.
Transmit Power – Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the
access point. The higher the transmission power, the farther the transmission
range. Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum
supported clients. You also have to ensure that high-power signals do not
interfere with the operation of other radio devices in the service area. (Options:
100%, 50%, 25%, 12%, minimum; Default: 100%)
Maximum Station Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the access
point transmits unicast packets on the wireless interface. The maximum
transmission distance is affected by the data rate. The lower the data rate,
the longer the transmission distance. (Default: 54 Mbps)
Antenna ID – Selects
the antenna to be used
by the AP. The optional external antennas that are certified for use with the access
point are listed in the drop-down menu. Selecting the correct antenna ID ensures
that the AP's radio transmissions are within regulatory power limits for the
country of operation. In the current release, select id-0x0108,
88
Operation
Radio Interface
module-ACC04-05427A Omni-Directional Ant from the list for the 8dBi omni
antenna(s). The unit will not transmit until an antenna is selected.
(Default:id=0x0000, module=NA)
NOTE
The Antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the Antenna Control Method to configure
proper use of any of the antenna options.
Antenna Control Method - Selects the use of two antennas operating in diversity
mode or a single antenna. (Default: Diversity)
„ Diversity: The radio uses two identical antennas in a diversity system.
„ Right: The radio uses a single antenna on the right side.
„ Left: The radio uses a single antenna on the left side.
Antenna Location – Selects the mounting location of the antenna in use. Selecting
the correct location ensures that the access point only uses radio channels that
are permitted in the country of operation. (Default: Outdoor)
MIC Mode – The Michael Integrity Check (MIC) is part of the Temporal Key
Integrity Protocol (TKIP) encryption used in WiFi Protected Access (WPA) security.
The MIC calculation is performed in the access point for each transmitted packet
and this can impact throughput and performance. The AP supports a choice of
software or hardware MIC calculation. The performance of the AP can be improved
by selecting the best method for the specific deployment. (Default: Software)
„ Hardware: Provides best performance when the number of supported clients is
less than 27.
„ Software: Provides the best performance for a large number of clients on one
radio interface. Throughput may be reduced when the 802.11g interface
supports a high number of clients simultaneously.
Super G – The Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements are
supported by the access point. These enhancements include bursting,
compression, and fast frames. Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60
Mbps for connections to Atheros-compatible clients. (Default: Disabled)
Radio Mode – Selects the operating mode for the 802.11g wireless interface.
(Default: 802.11b+g)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
89
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
„ 802.11b+g: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the
access point (up to 54 Mbps).
„ 802.11b only: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the
access point, but 802.11g clients can only transfer data at 802.11b standard
rates (up to 11 Mbps).
„ 802.11g only: Only 802.11g clients can communicate with the access point (up
to 54 Mbps).
Auto Channel Select – Enables the access point to automatically select an
unoccupied radio channel. (Default: Enabled)
Preamble – Sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a
data transmission. (Default: Long)
„ Long: Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds). Using a long preamble
ensures the access point can support all 802.11b and 802.11g clients.
„ Short or Long: Sets the preamble according to the capability of clients that are
currently associated. Uses a short preamble (96 microseconds) if all associated
clients can support it, otherwise a long preamble is used. The access point can
increase data throughput when using a short preamble, but will only use a
short preamble if it determines that all associated clients support it.
Beacon Interval – The rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the
access point. The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with
the access point. They may also carry power-management information.
(Range: 20-1000 TUs; Default: 100 TUs)
Data Beacon Rate – The rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to
receive broadcast/multicast transmissions.
Known also as the Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) interval, it indicates how
often the MAC layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic, which is necessary to
wake up stations that are using Power Save mode. The default value of 2 indicates
that the access point will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic
Service Set (BSS) and forward them after every second beacon. Using smaller
DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more timely manner,
causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power
faster. Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power
Save mode, but delays the transmission of broadcast/multicast frames.
(Range: 1-255 beacons; Default: 1 beacon)
90
Operation
Radio Interface
Multicast Data Rate – The maximum data rate at which the access point
transmits multicast and broadcast packets on the wireless interface. (Options:
24, 12, 6 Mbps; Default: 6 Mbps)
Fragmentation Length – Configures the minimum packet size that can be
fragmented when passing through the access point. Fragmentation of the PDUs
(Package Data Unit) can increase the reliability of transmissions because it
increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size. If
there is significant interference present, or collisions due to high network
utilization, try setting the fragment size to send smaller fragments. This will speed
up the retransmission of smaller frames. However, it is more efficient to set the
fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present because it requires
overhead to send multiple frames. (Range: 256-2346 bytes; Default: 2346 bytes)
RTS Threshold – Sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS)
signal must be sent to a receiving station prior to the sending station starting
communications. The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to
negotiate the sending of a data frame. After receiving an RTS frame, the station
sends a CTS (clear to send) frame to notify the sending station that it can start
sending data.
If the RTS threshold is set to 0, the access point always sends RTS signals. If set
to 2347, the access point never sends RTS signals. If set to any other value, and
the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold, the RTS/CTS (Request to
Send / Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled.
The APs contending for the medium may not be aware of each other. The
RTS/CTS mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node Problem.” (Range: 0-2347
bytes: Default: 2347 bytes)
4.4.1.2.2
CLI Commands for the 802.11g Wireless Interface
From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless g command to
access the 802.11g radio interface. The 802.11g radio can be forced to an
802.11g-only, 802.11b-only, or mixed 802.11b/g operating mode using the
radio-mode command. You should set the desired operating mode before
configuring channel settings (the default is mixed 802.11b/g operation). Select a
radio channel or set selection to Auto using the channel command. Set any
other radio settings as required before enabling the VAP interface (with the no
shutdown command). To view the current 802.11g radio settings for the VAP
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
91
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
interface, use the show interface wireless g [0~3] command as shown on
page 210.
Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g
Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#radio-mode g
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#channel auto
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#transmit-power full
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#super-g
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#preamble short
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
4.4.1.2.3
210
214
213
213
218
214
CLI Commands for the Radio Settings
From the global configuration mode, enter the interface wireless g command to
access the 802.11g radio interface. From the 802.11g interface mode, you can
access radio settings that apply to all VAP interfaces. Use the turbo command to
enable this feature before setting the radio channel with the channel command.
Set any other radio setting as required before enabling the VAP interface (with the
no shutdown command). To view the current 802.11g radio settings for the VAP
interface, use the show interface wireless g [0~3] command as shown on
page 210.
Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g
Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#channel 42
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#transmit-power full
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#speed 9
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna id 0000
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna control right
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna location outdoor
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#mic_mode hardware
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#super-g
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#dtim-period 5
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#multicast-data-rate 6
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#fragmentation-length 512
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rts-threshold 256
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
4.4.1.3
210
213
213
211
215
215
216
235
218
216
216
211
217
218
Configuring WiFi Multimedia
Wireless networks offer an equal opportunity for all devices to transmit data from
any type of application. Although this is acceptable for most applications,
multimedia applications (with audio and video) are particularly sensitive to the
delay and throughput variations that result from this “equal opportunity” wireless
access method. For multimedia applications to run well over a wireless network, a
92
Operation
Radio Interface
Quality of Service (QoS) mechanism is required to prioritize traffic types and
provide an “enhanced opportunity” wireless access method.
The access point implements QoS using the WiFi Multimedia (WMM) standard.
Using WMM, the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance
when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same
time. WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the developing IEEE 802.11e
QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter operate with both WMMenabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality.
Access Categories — WMM defines four access categories (ACs): voice, video, best
effort, and background. These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and
are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags (see Table 4-5). The direct mapping of
the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate inter
operability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified
for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to
match any network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that access
points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to
QoS-enabled wireless clients.
Table 4-5: WMM Access Categories
Access
Category
WMM
Designation
Description
802.1D
Tags
AC_VO (AC3)
Voice
Highest priority, minimum delay. Time-sensitive data such as
VoIP (Voice over IP) calls.
7, 6
AC_VI (AC2)
Video
High priority, minimum delay. Time-sensitive data such as
streaming video.
5, 4
AC_BE (AC0)
Best Effort
Normal priority, medium delay and throughput. Data only
affected by long delays. Data from applications or devices that
lack QoS capabilities.
0, 3
AC_BK (AC1)
Background
Lowest priority. Data with no delay or throughput
requirements, such as bulk data transfers.
2, 1
WMM Operation — WMM uses traffic priority based on the four ACs; Voice,
Video, Best Effort, and Background. The higher the AC priority, the higher the
probability that data is transmitted.
When the access point forwards traffic, WMM adds data packets to four
independent transmit queues, one for each AC, depending on the 802.1D priority
tag of the packet. Data packets without a priority tag are always added to the Best
Effort AC queue. From the four queues, an internal “virtual” collision resolution
mechanism first selects data with the highest priority to be granted a transmit
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
93
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
opportunity. Then the same collision resolution mechanism is used externally to
determine which device has access to the wireless medium.
For each AC queue, the collision resolution mechanism is dependent on two
timing parameters:
„ AIFSN (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space Number), a number used to calculate
the minimum time between data frames
„ CW (Contention Window), a number used to calculate a random backoff time
After a collision detection, a backoff wait time is calculated. The total wait time is
the sum of a minimum wait time (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space, or AIFS)
determined from the AIFSN, and a random backoff time calculated from a value
selected from zero to the CW. The CW value varies within a configurable range. It
starts at CWMin and doubles after every collision up to a maximum value,
CWMax. After a successful transmission, the CW value is reset to its CWMin
value.
Figure 4-21: WMM Backoff Wait Times
For high-priority traffic, the AIFSN and CW values are smaller. The smaller values
equate to less backoff and wait time, and therefore more transmit opportunities.
To configure WMM, select the Radio Settings page, and scroll down to the WMM
configuration settings.
94
Operation
Radio Interface
Figure 4-22: WMM Configuration Settings
WMM – Sets the WMM operational mode on the AP. When enabled, the
parameters for each AC queue will be employed on the access point and QoS
capabilities are advertised to WMM-enabled clients. (Default: Support)
„ Disable: WMM is disabled.
„ Support: WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this
feature. Devices that do not support this feature may still associate with the
access point.
„ Required: WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the
access point. Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to
associate with the access point.
WMM Acknowledge Policy – By default, all wireless data transmissions require
the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver. WMM allows the
acknowledgement wait time to be turned off for each Access Category (AC).
Although this increases data throughput, it can also result in a high number of
errors when traffic levels are heavy. (Default: Acknowledge)
WMM BSS Parameters – These parameters apply to the wireless clients.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
95
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
WMM AP Parameters – These parameters apply to the access point.
„ logCWMin (Minimum Contention Window) – The initial upper limit of the
random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted.
The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the CWMin value.
Specify the CWMin value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note that the
CWMin value must be equal or less than the CWMax value.
„ logCWMax (Maximum Contention Window) – The maximum upper limit of the
random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted.
The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the
CWMax value. Specify the CWMax value in the range 0-15 microseconds. Note
that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the CWMin value.
„ AIFS (Arbitration Inter-Frame Space) – The minimum amount of wait time
before the next data transmission attempt. Specify the AIFS value in the range
0-15 microseconds.
„ TXOP Limit (Transmit Opportunity Limit) – The maximum time an AC
transmit queue has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is
granted a transmit opportunity, it can transmit data for a time up to the
TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high
data-rate traffic. Specify a value in the range 0-65535 microseconds.
„ Admission Control – The admission control mode for the access category.
When enabled, clients are blocked from using the access category. (Default:
Disabled)
Key Type – See “Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)” on page 104.
4.4.1.3.1
CLI Commands for WMM
Enter interface wireless mode and type wmm required for clients that want to
associate with the access point. The wmm-acknowledge-policy command is used
to enable or disable a policy for each access category. The wmmparms command
defines detailed WMM parameters.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm required
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm-acknowledge-policy 0 noack
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmmparams ap 0 4 6 3 1 1
96
245
245
246
Operation
Radio Interface
To view the current 802.11g radio settings for the VAP interface, use the show
interface wireless g [0-3] command.
Enterprise AP#show interface wireless g 0
222
Wireless Interface Information
=============================================================
--------------------Identification--------------------------Description
: Enterprise 802.11g Access Point
SSID
: VAP_TEST_11G 0
Turbo Mode
: DISABLED
Channel
: 36 (AUTO)
Status
: DISABLED
MAC Address
: 00:12:cf:05:95:0c
----------------802.11 Parameters--------------------------Transmit Power
: FULL (16 dBm)
Max Station Data Rate
: 54Mbps
Multicast Data Rate
: 6Mbps
Fragmentation Threshold
: 2346 bytes
RTS Threshold
: 2347 bytes
Beacon Interval
: 100 TUs
Authentication Timeout Interval : 60 Mins
Association Timeout Interval
: 30 Mins
DTIM Interval
: 1 beacon
Maximum Association
: 64 stations
MIC Mode
: Software
Super G
: Disabled
VLAN ID
: 1
----------------Security------------------------------------Closed System
: Disabled
Multicast cipher
: WEP
WPA clients
: TKIP and AES
WPA Key Mgmt Mode
: PRE SHARED KEY
WPA PSK Key Type
: PASSPHRASE
Encryption
: DISABLED
Default Transmit Key
: 1
Common Static Keys
: Key 1: EMPTY
Key 2: EMPTY
Key 3: EMPTY
Key 4: EMPTY
Authentication Type
: OPEN
----------------802.1x--------------------------------------802.1x
Broadcast Key Refresh Rate
: 30 min
Session Key Refresh Rate
: 30 min
802.1x Session Timeout Value
: 0 min
----------------Antenna-------------------------------------Antenna Control method
: Diversity
Antenna ID
: 0x0000(Default Antenna)
Antenna Location
: Outdoor
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
97
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
----------------Quality of Service--------------------------WMM Mode
: SUPPORTED
WMM Acknowledge Policy
AC0(Best Effort)
: Ack
AC1(Background)
: Acknowledge
AC2(Video)
: Acknowledge
AC3(Voice)
: Acknowledge
WMM BSS Parameters
AC0(Best Effort)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC1(Background)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC2(Video)
: logCwMin: 3 logCwMax: 4 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 3.008 ms
AC3(Voice)
: logCwMin: 2 logCwMax: 3 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms
WMM AP Parameters
AC0(Best Effort)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 6 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC1(Background)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC2(Video)
: logCwMin: 3 logCwMax: 4 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 3.008 ms
AC3(Voice)
: logCwMin: 2 logCwMax: 3 AIFSN:
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms
=============================================================
Enterprise AP#
4.4.2
Security
The access point is configured by default as an “open system,” which broadcasts a
beacon signal including the configured SSID. Wireless clients with an SSID setting
of “any” can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically set their SSID to
allow immediate connection to the nearest access point.
To improve wireless network security, you have to implement two main functions:
„ Authentication: It must be verified that clients attempting to connect to the
network are authorized users.
„ Traffic Encryption: Data passing between the access point and clients must be
protected from interception and eavesdropping.
98
Operation
Radio Interface
For a more secure network, the AP can implement one or a combination of the
following security mechanisms:
„ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) page 99
„ IEEE 802.1X page 114
„ Wireless MAC address filtering page 54
„ WiFi Protected Access (WPA or WPA2) page 108
Both WEP and WPA security settings are configurable separately for each virtual
access point (VAP) interface. MAC address filtering, and RADIUS server settings
are global and apply to all VAP interfaces.
The security mechanisms that may be employed depend on the level of security
required, the network and management resources available, and the software
support provided on wireless clients.
A summary of wireless security considerations is listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6: Wireless Security Considerations
Security
Mechanism
Client Support
Implementation Considerations
WEP
Built-in support on all 802.11g
devices
„ Provides only weak security
„ Requires manual key management
WEP over 802.1X
Requires 802.1X client support in
system or by add-in software
„ Provides dynamic key rotation for improved WEP
(support provided in Windows
2000 SP3 or later and Windows
XP)
„ Requires configured RADIUS server
security
„ 802.1X EAP type may require management of digital
certificates for clients and server
MAC Address
Filtering
Uses the MAC address of client
network card
„ Provides only weak user authentication
„ Management of authorized MAC addresses
„ Can be combined with other methods for improved
security
„ Optionally configured RADIUS server
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
99
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Table 4-6: Wireless Security Considerations
Security
Mechanism
Client Support
Implementation Considerations
WPA over 802.1X
Mode
Requires WPA-enabled system
and network card driver
„ Provides robust security in WPA-only mode
(native support provided in
Windows XP)
„ Offers support for legacy WEP clients, but with
(i.e., WPA clients only)
increased security risk (i.e., WEP authentication
keys disabled)
„ Requires configured RADIUS server
„ 802.1X EAP type may require management of digital
certificates for clients and server
WPA PSK Mode
Requires WPA-enabled system
and network card driver
(native support provided in
Windows XP)
WPA2 with 802.1X
Requires WPA-enabled system
and network card driver (native
support provided in Windows XP)
„ Provides good security in small networks
„ Requires manual management of pre-shared key
„ Provides the strongest security in WPA2-only mode
„ Provides robust security in mixed mode for WPA and
WPA2 clients
„ Offers fast roaming for time-sensitive client
applications
„ Requires configured RADIUS server
„ 802.1X EAP type may require management of digital
certificates for clients and server
„ Clients may require hardware upgrade to be WPA2
compliant
WPA2 PSK Mode
Requires WPA-enabled system
and network card driver (native
support provided in Windows XP)
„ Provides robust security in small networks
„ Requires manual management of pre-shared key
„ Clients may require hardware upgrade to be WPA2
compliant
NOTE
You must enable data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable all types of encryption
(WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point.
The AP can simultaneously support clients using various different security
mechanisms. The configuration for these security combinations are outlined in
the following table. Note that MAC address authentication can be configured
100
Operation
Radio Interface
independently to work with all security mechanisms and is indicated separately in
the table. Required RADIUS server support is also listed.
Table 4-7: Security Combinations
Client Security
Combination
Configuration Summarya
MAC
Authenticationb
RADIUS
Server
No encryption and no
authentication
Interface Detail Settings:
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
Yes3
Static WEP only (with
or without shared key
authentication)
Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys
Select a WEP transmit key for the interface
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
Yesc
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
Yesd
Local only
Yes
Local only
No
Authentication: Open System
Encryption: Disable
802.1x: Disable
Interface Detail Settings:
Authentication: Shared Key or Open System
Encryption: Enable
802.1x: Disable
Dynamic WEP
(802.1x) only
Interface Detail Settings:
802.1x WPA only
Interface Detail Settings:
Authentication: Open System
Encryption: Enable
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
Authentication: WPA
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: TKIP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
WPA Pre-Shared Key
only
Interface Detail Settings:
Authentication: WPA-PSK
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Configuration: TKIP
802.1x: Disable
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadicmal or
Alphanumeric
Enter a WPA Pre-shared key
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
101
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
Table 4-7: Security Combinations
Client Security
Combination
Configuration Summarya
MAC
Authenticationb
RADIUS
Server
Static and dynamic
(802.1x) WEP keys
Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys
Select a WEP transmit key
Local, RADIUS, or
Disabled
Yes
Local or Disabled
Yes
Local or Disabled
Yes
Local or Disabled
Yes
Interface Detail Settings:
Authentication: Open System
Encryption: Enable
802.1x: Supported
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
Dynamic WEP and
802.1x WPA
Interface Detail Settings:
Static and dynamic
(802.1x) WEP keys
and 802.1x WPA
Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys
Select a WEP transmit key
Authentication: WPA
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Supported
Cipher Suite: WEP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
Interface Detail Settings:
Authentication: WPA
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Supported
Cipher Suite: WEP
802.1x: Supported
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
802.1x WPA2 only
Interface Detail Settings:
Authentication: WPA2
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: AES-CCMP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
102
Operation
Radio Interface
Table 4-7: Security Combinations
Client Security
Combination
Configuration Summarya
MAC
Authenticationb
RADIUS
Server
WPA2 Pre-Shared Key
only
Interface Detail Settings:
Local or Disabled
No
802.1x WPA-WPA2
Mixed Mode
Interface Detail Settings:
Local or Disabled
Yes
WPA-WPA2 Mixed
Mode Pre-Shared Key
Interface Detail Settings:
Local or Disabled
No
Authentication: WPA2-PSK
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuraton: Required
Cipher Suite: AES-CCMP
802.1x: Disable
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadicmal or
Alphanumeric
Enter a WPA Pre-shared key
Authentication: WPA-WPA2-mixed
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: TKIP
802.1x: Required
Set 802.1x key refresh and reauthentication rates
Authentication: WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed
Encryption: Enable
WPA Configuration: Required
Cipher Suite: TKIP
802.1x: Disable
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hexadicmal or
Alphanumeric
Enter a WPA Pre-shared key
a. The configuration summary does not include the set up for MAC authentication or RADIUS server .
b. The configuration of RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1x WPA or WPA Pre-shared Key
is not supported.
c. RADIUS server required only when RADIUS MAC authentication is configured.
d. RADIUS server required only when RADIUS MAC authentication is configured.
NOTE
If you choose to configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802.1X, the RADIUS MAC
address authentication occurs prior to 802.1X authentication. Only when RADIUS MAC
authentication succeeds is 802.1X authentication performed. When RADIUS MAC authentication
fails, 802.1X authentication is not performed.
4.4.2.1
Enabling the VAPs
Before enabling the Virtual Access Point (VAP) radio interfaces, first configure all
of the relevant radio settings (see “Radio Settings G (802.11g)” on page 81.)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
103
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
After you have configured the radio settings, select Security under Radio G, set an
SSID to identify the wireless network service provided by each VAP you want to
use, and then click Apply to save your settings.
Before enabling the radio service for any VAP, first configure the WEP, WPA, and
802.1X security settings described in the following sections. After you have
finished configuring the security settings, return to the main Security page shown
below, start the required VAP interfaces by clicking the Enable checkbox, and
then click Apply.
Figure 4-23: Security
Enable – Enables radio communications on the VAP interface. (Default: Disabled)
NOTE
You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable other VAP interfaces.
SSID – The name of the basic service set provided by a VAP interface. Clients that
want to connect to the network through the access point must set their SSID to
the same as that of an access point VAP interface. (Default: VAP_TEST_11A #
(0-3); Range: 1-32 characters)
4.4.2.2
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)
WEP provides a basic level of security, preventing unauthorized access to the
network, and encrypting data transmitted between wireless clients and the access
104
Operation
Radio Interface
point. WEP uses static shared keys (fixed-length hexadecimal or alphanumeric
strings) that are manually distributed to all clients that want to use the network.
WEP is the security protocol initially specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard for
wireless communications. Unfortunately, WEP has been found to be seriously
flawed and cannot be recommended for a high level of network security. For more
robust wireless security, the access point provides WiFi Protected Access (WPA)
for improved data encryption and user authentication.
Setting up shared keys enables the basic IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) on the access point to prevent unauthorized access to the network.
If you choose to use WEP shared keys instead of an open system, be sure to define
at least one static WEP key for user authentication and data encryption. Also, be
sure that the WEP shared keys are the same for each client in the wireless
network.
NOTE
All clients share the same keys, which are used for user authentication and data encryption. Up to
four keys can be specified. These four keys are used for all VAP interfaces on the same radio.
To set up WEP shared keys, click Radio Settings.
Figure 4-24: WEP Shared Keys
Key Type – Select the preferred method of entering WEP encryption keys on the
access point and enter up to four keys:
„ Hexadecimal: Enter keys as 10 hexadecimal digits (0-9 and A-F) for 64 bit
keys, 26 hexadecimal digits for 128 bit keys, or 32 hexadecimal digits for 152
bit keys (802.11g radio only). This is the default setting.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
105
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
„ Alphanumeric: Enter keys as 5 alphanumeric characters for 64 bit keys, 13
alphanumeric characters for 128 bit keys, or 16 alphanumeric characters for
152 bit keys.
Key Number – Selects the key number to use for encryption for each VAP interface.
If the clients have all four keys configured to the same values, you can change the
encryption key to any of the four settings without having to update the client keys.
(Default: Key 1)
Shared Key Setup – Select 64 Bit, 128 Bit, or 152 Bit key length. Note that the
same size of encryption key must be supported on all wireless clients. (Default:
None)
NOTE
„ Key index and type must match that configured on the clients.
„ In a mixed-mode environment with clients using static WEP keys and WPA, select WEP transmit
key index 2, 3, or 4. The access point uses transmit key index 1 for the generation of dynamic
keys.
To enable WEP shared keys for a VAP interface, click Security. Then, select the
VAP interface that will use WEP keys by clicking More, and configure the
Authentication Type Setup and Encryption fields.
Figure 4-25: Security - Shared Keys
Authentication Type Setup – Sets the access point to communicate as an open
system that accepts network access attempts from any client, or with clients
using pre-configured static shared keys. (Default: Open System)
106
Operation
Radio Interface
„ Open System: If you don’t set up any other security mechanism on the access
point, the network has no protection and is open to all users. This is the
default setting.
„ Shared Key: Sets the access point to use WEP shared keys. If this option is
selected, you must configure at least one key on the access point and all
clients.
NOTE
To use 802.1X on wireless clients requires a network card driver and 802.1X client software that
supports the EAP authentication type that you want to use. Windows 2000 SP3 or later and
Windows XP provide 802.1X client support. Windows XP also provides native WPA support. Other
systems require additional client software to support 802.1X and WPA.
Encryption – Enable or disable the access point to use data encryption (WEP,
TKIP, or AES). If this option is selected when using static WEP keys, you must
configure at least one key on the access point and all clients. (Default: Disabled)
NOTE
You must enable data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable all types of encryption
(WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the AP.
4.4.2.2.1
CLI Commands for WEP Shared Key Security
To enable WEP shared key security for the 802.11g interface, use the interface
wireless g command from the CLI configuration mode to access the interface
mode for the 802.11g radio. First use the key command to define up to four WEP
keys that can be used for all VAP interfaces on the radio. Then use the vap
command to access each VAP interface to configure other security settings.
From the VAP interface configuration mode, use the auth command to enable
WEP shared-key authentication, which enables encryption automatically. Then
set one key as the transmit key for the VAP interface using the transmit-key
command. To view the current security settings, use the show interface wireless
g [0-3] command from the Exec mode.
4.4.2.2.2
CLI Commands for WEP over 802.1X Security
Use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure the security
settings. First set 802.1X to required using the 802.1x command and set the
802.1X key refresh rates. Then, use the auth command to select open system
authentication and the encryption command to enable data encryption. To view
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
107
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
the current security settings, use the show interface wireless g [0-3] command
(not shown in example).
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
4.4.2.3
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
g)#vap 0
g: VAP[0])#802.1X required
g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-timeout 300
g: VAP[0])#auth open-system
g: VAP[0])#encryption
g: VAP[0])#
191
230
232
WiFi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA employs a combination of several technologies to provide an enhanced
security solution for 802.11 wireless networks.
The access point supports the following WPA components and features:
IEEE 802.1X and the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP): WPA employs
802.1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key
management. The 802.1X client and RADIUS server should use an appropriate
EAP type—such as EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security), EAP-TTLS (Tunneled
TLS), or PEAP (Protected EAP)—for strongest authentication. Working together,
these protocols provide “mutual authentication” between a client, the access
point, and a RADIUS server that prevents users from accidentally joining a rogue
network. Only when a RADIUS server has authenticated a user’s credentials will
encryption keys be sent to the access point and client.
NOTE
To implement WPA on wireless clients requires a WPA-enabled network card driver and 802.1X
client software that supports the EAP authentication type that you want to use. Windows XP
provides native WPA support, other systems require additional software.
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP): WPA specifies TKIP as the data
encryption method to replace WEP. TKIP avoids the problems of WEP static keys
by dynamically changing data encryption keys. Basically, TKIP starts with a
master (temporal) key for each user session and then mathematically generates
other keys to encrypt each data packet. TKIP provides further data encryption
enhancements by including a message integrity check for each packet and a
re-keying mechanism, which periodically changes the master key.
WPA Pre-Shared Key Mode (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK): For enterprise deployment,
WPA requires a RADIUS authentication server to be configured on the wired
network. However, for small office networks that may not have the resources to
configure and maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating mode
that uses just a pre-shared password for network access. The Pre-Shared Key
mode uses a common password for user authentication that is manually entered
on the access point and all wireless clients. The PSK mode uses the same TKIP
108
Operation
Radio Interface
packet encryption and key management as WPA in the enterprise, providing a
robust and manageable alternative for small networks.
Mixed WPA and WEP Client Support: WPA enables the access point to indicate
its supported encryption and authentication mechanisms to clients using its
beacon signal. WPA-compatible clients can likewise respond to indicate their WPA
support. This enables the access point to determine which clients are using WPA
security and which are using legacy WEP. The access point uses TKIP unicast
data encryption keys for WPA clients and WEP unicast keys for WEP clients. The
global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all
clients, therefore it restricts encryption to a WEP key.
When access is opened to both WPA and WEP clients, no authentication is
provided for the WEP clients through shared keys. To support authentication for
WEP clients in this mixed mode configuration, you can use either MAC
authentication or 802.1X authentication.
WPA2 – WPA was introduced as an interim solution for the vulnerability of WEP
pending the ratification of the IEEE 802.11i wireless security standard. In effect,
the WPA security features are a subset of the 802.11i standard. WPA2 includes
the now ratified 802.11i standard, but also offers backward compatibility with
WPA. Therefore, WPA2 includes the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and
support for TKIP encryption. The main differences and enhancements in WPA2
can be summarized as follows:
„ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): WPA2 uses AES Counter-Mode
encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code
(CBC-MAC) for message integrity. The AES Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol
(AES-CCMP) provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128-bit
key. The AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement
for WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP
requires hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement WPA2 in
the network, wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2-compliant hardware.
„ WPA2 Mixed-Mode: WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for
networks moving from WPA security to WPA2. WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both
WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common SSID interface. In mixed
mode, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or AES-CCMP) is negotiated for
each client. The access point advertises its supported encryption ciphers in
beacon frames and probe responses. WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher
they support and return the choice in the association request to the access
point. For mixed-mode operation, the cipher used for broadcast frames is
always TKIP. WEP encryption is not allowed.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
109
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
„ Key Caching: WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by
retaining keys and other security information in a cache, so that if a client
roams away from an access point and then returns, re-authentication is not
required. When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise
Master Key (PMK) that is used to generate other keys for unicast data
encryption. This key and other client information form a Security Association
that the access point names and holds in a cache.
„ Preauthentication: Each time a client roams to another access point it has to
be fully re-authenticated. This authentication process is time consuming and
can disrupt applications running over the network. WPA2 includes a
mechanism, known as pre-authentication, that allows clients to roam to a new
access point and be quickly associated. The first time a client is authenticated
to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated. When the client is about
to roam to another access point in the network, the access point sends
pre-authentication messages to the new access point that include the client’s
security association information. Then when the client sends an association
request to the new access point, the client is known to be already
authenticated, so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association.
To configure WPA, click Security, select one of the VAP interfaces by clicking
More. Select one of the WPA options in the Authentication Setup table, and then
configure the parameters displayed beneath the table.
110
Operation
Radio Interface
Figure 4-26: Security - WPA Configuration
The WPA configuration parameters are described below:
Encryption – You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of
encryption (WEP, TKIP, or AES) in the access point.
Pre-Authentication – When using WPA2 over 802.1X, pre-authentication can be
enabled, which allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly
associated without performing full 802.1X authentication. (Default: Disabled)
Authentication Setup – To use WPA or WPA2, set the access point to one of the
following options. If a WPA/WPA2 mode that operates over 802.1X is selected
(WPA, WPA2, or WPA-WPA2-mixed), the 802.1X settings and RADIUS server
details need to be configured. Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server
on the network before enabling authentication. If a WPA/WPA2 Pre-shared Key
mode is selected (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or WPA-WPA2 PSK-Mixed), be sure to
specify the key string.
„ WPA: Clients using WPA over 802.1X are accepted for authentication.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
111
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
„ WPA-PSK: Clients using WPA with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for
authentication.
„ WPA2: Clients using WPA2 over 802.1X are accepted for authentication.
„ WPA2-PSK: Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for
authentication.
„ WPA-WPA2-mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 over 802.1X are accepted for
authentication.
„ WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed: Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are
accepted for authentication.
WPA Configuration – Each VAP interface can be configured to allow only
WPA-enabled clients to access the network (Required), or to allow access to both
WPA and WEP clients (Supported). (Default: Required)
Cipher Suite – Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast
and broadcast traffic, which is supported by all wireless clients.
„ WEP: WEP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. You should select WEP
only when both WPA and WEP clients are supported.
„ TKIP: TKIP is used as the multicast encryption cipher.
„ AES-CCMP: AES-CCMP is used as the multicast encryption cipher. AES-CCMP
is the standard encryption cipher required for WPA2.
WPA Pre-Shared Key Type – If the WPA or WPA2 pre-shared-key mode is used, all
wireless clients must be configured with the same key to communicate with the
AP.
„ Hexadecimal – Enter a key as a string of 64 hexadecimal numbers.
„ Alphanumeric – Enter a key as an easy-to-remember form of letters and
numbers. The string must be from 8 to 63 characters, which can include
spaces.
The configuration settings for WPA are summarized in Table 4-8:
112
Operation
Radio Interface
Table 4-8: WPA Configuration Settings
WPA and WPA2 pre-shared key only
WPA and WPA2 over 802.1X
Encryption: Enabled
Encryption: Enabled
Authentication Setup: WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, or
WPA-WPA2-mixed
Authentication Setup: WPA, WPA2,
WPA-WPA2-mixed
Cipher Suite: WEP/TKIP/AES-CCMP
Cipher Suite: WEP/TKIP/AES-CCMP
WPA Pre-shared Key Type: Hex/ASCII
(requires RADIUS server to be specified)
1:You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption in the access point.
2:Select TKIP when any WPA clients do not support AES. Select AES only if all clients support AES.
4.4.2.3.1
CLI Commands for WPA Using Pre-shared Key Security
From the VAP interface configuration mode, use the auth wpa-psk required
command to enable WPA Pre-shared Key security. To enter a key value, use the
wpa-pre-shared-key command to specify a hexadecimal or alphanumeric key. To
view the current security settings, use the show interface wireless a [0-3] or
show interface wireless g [0-3] command (not shown in example).
Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g
Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key
passphrase-key agoodsecret
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth wpa-psk required
Data Encryption is set to Enabled.
WPA2 Clients Mode is set to Disabled.
WPA Clients Mode is set to Required.
WPA Multicast Cipher is set to TKIP.
WPA Unicast Cipher can accept TKIP only.
WPA Authentication is set to Pre-Shared Key.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
4.4.2.3.2
210
235
CLI Commands for WPA Over 802.1X Security
From the VAP interface configuration mode, use the auth wpa required command
to select WPA over 802.1X security. Then set the 802.1X key refresh rates. To view
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
113
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
the current security settings, use the show interface wireless a [0-3] or show
interface wireless g [0-3] command (not shown in example).
Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g
Enter Wireless configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth wpa required
Data Encryption is set to Enabled.
WPA2 Clients mode is set to Disabled.
WPA Clients Mode is set to Required.
WPA Multicast Cipher is set to TKIP.
WPA Unicast Cipher can accept TKIP only.
WPA Authentication is set to 802.1X Required.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X broadcast-key-refresh-rate 5
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X
session-key-refresh-rate 5
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#802.1X session-timeout 300
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
4.4.2.4
210
Configuring 802.1X
IEEE 802.1X is a standard framework for network access control that uses a
central RADIUS server for user authentication. This control feature prevents
unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802.1X client application to
submit user credentials for authentication. The 802.1X standard uses the
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to pass user credentials (either digital
certificates, user names and passwords, or other) from the client to the RADIUS
server. Client authentication is then verified on the RADIUS server before the
access point grants client access to the network.
The 802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and
static broadcast keys to wireless clients. Session keys are unique to each client
and are used to encrypt and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and
the access point. You can also enable broadcast key rotation, so the access point
provides a dynamic broadcast key and changes it at a specified interval.
Open the Security page, and click More for one of the VAP interfaces.
Figure 4-27: 802.1X Configuration
114
Operation
Radio Interface
You can enable 802.1X as optionally supported or as required to enhance the
security of the wireless network. (Default: Disable)
„ Disable: The AP does not support 802.1X authentication for any wireless
client. After successful wireless association with the access point, each client
is allowed to access the network.
„ Supported: The access point supports 802.1X authentication only for clients
initiating the 802.1X authentication process (i.e., the access point does not
initiate 802.1X authentication). For clients initiating 802.1X, only those
successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network. For those clients
not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful
wireless association with the access point. The 802.1X supported mode allows
access for clients not using WPA or WPA2 security.
„ Required: The access point enforces 802.1X authentication for all associated
wireless clients. If 802.1X authentication is not initiated by a client, the AP will
initiate authentication. Only those clients successfully authenticated with
802.1X are allowed to access the network.
NOTE
If 802.1X is enabled on the access point, then RADIUS setup must be completed (see “RADIUS”
on page 4-48.).
4.4.2.4.1
CLI Commands for 802.1X Authentication
Use the 802.1X supported command from the VAP interface mode to enable
802.1X authentication. Set the session and broadcast key refresh rate, and the
re-authentication timeout. To display the current settings, use the show
interface wireless command from the Exec mode (not shown in the example).
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP#
g:
g:
g:
g:
VAP[0])#802.1X
VAP[0])#802.1X
VAP[0])#802.1X
VAP[0])#802.1X
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
supported
broadcast-key-refresh-rate 5
session-key-refresh-rate 5
session-timeout 300
191
115
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.5
Status Information
The Status page includes information on the following items:
Table 4-9: Status Page Information
Menu
Description
Page
AP Status
Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the wireless
interface
116
Station Status
Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access point
118
Event Logs
Shows log messages stored in memory
120
4.5.1
Access Point Status
The AP Status window displays basic system configuration settings, as well as the
settings for the wireless interface.
Figure 4-28: AP Status
116
Operation
Status Information
AP System Configuration – The AP System Configuration table displays the basic
system configuration settings:
„ System Up Time: Length of time the management agent has been up.
„ Ethernet MAC: The physical layer address for the Ethernet port.
„ Radio G MAC: The physical layer address for the 802.11b/g interface. System
Name: Name assigned to this system.
„ System Contact: Administrator responsible for the system.
„ IP Address: IP address of the management interface for this device.
„ IP Default Gateway: IP address of the gateway router between this device and
management stations that exist on other network segments.
„ HTTP Server: Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.
„ HTTP Server Port: Shows the TCP port used by the HTTP interface.
„ Software Version: Shows the software version number.
„ Bootrom Version: Show the bootrom version number.
„ Hardware Version: Shows the hardware version number.
AP Wireless Configuration – The AP Wireless Configuration tables display the
radio and VAP interface settings listed below.
„ SSID: The service set identifier for the VAP interface.
„ Radio Channel: The radio channel through which the access point
communicates with wireless clients.
„ Encryption: The key size used for data encryption.
„ Authentication Type: Shows the type of authentication used.
„ 802.1X: Shows if IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients is enabled.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
117
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.5.1.0.1
CLI Commands for Displaying System Settings
To view the current access point system settings, use the show system command
from the Exec mode. To view the current radio interface settings, use the show
interface wireless a or show interface wireless g command (see page 222).
Enterprise AP#show system
System Information
==========================================================
Serial Number
: A123456789
System Up time
: 0 days, 4 hours, 33 minutes, 29 seconds
System Name
: Enterprise wireless gP
System Location
System Contact
System Country Code
: US - UNITED STATES
MAC Address
: 00-30-F1-F0-9A-9C
IP Address
: 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 0.0.0.0
VLAN State
: DISABLED
Management VLAN ID(AP): 1
IAPP State
: ENABLED
DHCP Client
: ENABLED
HTTP Server
: ENABLED
HTTP Server Port
: 80
HTTPS Server
: ENABLED
HTTPS Server Port
: 443
Slot Status
: 802.11g only
Boot Rom Version
: v2.1.6
Software Version
: v4.3.3.8b02
SSH Server
: ENABLED
SSH Server Port
: 22
Telnet Server
: ENABLED
WEB Redirect
: DISABLED
DHCP Relay
: DISABLED
==========================================================
Enterprise AP
4.5.2
149
Station Status
The Station Status window shows the wireless clients currently associated with
the access point.
118
Operation
Status Information
Figure 4-29: Station Status
The Station Configuration page displays basic connection information for all
associated stations as described below. This page is automatically refreshed every
five seconds.
„ Station Address: The MAC address of the wireless client.
„ Authenticated: Shows if the station has been authenticated. The two basic
methods of authentication supported for 802.11 wireless networks are “open
system” and “shared key.” Open-system authentication accepts any client
attempting to connect to the access point without verifying its identity. The
shared-key approach uses Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) to verify client
identity by distributing a shared key to stations before attempting
authentication.
„ Associated: Shows if the station has been successfully associated with the
access point. Once authentication is completed, stations can associate with
the current access point, or reassociate with a new access point. The
association procedure allows the wireless system to track the location of each
mobile client, and ensure that frames destined for each client are forwarded to
the appropriate access point.
„ Forwarding Allowed: Shows if the station has passed 802.1X authentication
and is now allowed to forward traffic to the access point.
„ Key Type – Displays one of the following:
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
119
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
‘ WEP Disabled – The client is not using Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)
encryption keys.
‘ Dynamic – The client is using WiFi Protected Access (802.1X or pre-shared
key mode) or using 802.1X authentication with dynamic keying.
‘ Static – The client is using static WEP keys for encryption.
4.5.2.0.1
CLI Commands for Displaying Station Status
To view status of clients currently associated with the access point, use the show
station command from the Exec mode.
Enterprise AP#show station
224
Station Table Information
===========================================================
if-wireless G VAP [0]
802.11g Channel : Auto
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
if-wireless G VAP [1]
802.11g Channel : Auto
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
....
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
if-wireless G VAP [3]
802.11g Channel : Auto
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
===========================================================
Enterprise AP#
4.5.3
Event Logs
The Event Logs window shows the log messages generated by the AP and stored in
memory.
120
Operation
Status Information
Figure 4-30: Event Log
The Event Logs table displays the following information:
„ Log Time: The time the log message was generated.
„ Event Level: The logging level associated with this message. For a description
of the various levels, see “logging level” on page 70.
„ Event Message: The content of the log message.
Error Messages : An example of a logged error message is: “Station Failed to
authenticate (unsupported algorithm).”
This message may be caused by any of the following conditions:
„ AP was set to Open Authentication, but a client sent an authentication request
frame with a Shared key.
„ AP was set to Shared Key Authentication, but a client sent an authentication
frame for Open System.
„ WEP keys do not match: When the AP uses Shared Key Authentication, but the
key used by client and access point are not the same, the frame will be
decrypted incorrectly, using the wrong algorithm and sequence number.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
121
Chapter 4 - System Configuration
4.5.3.0.1
CLI Commands for Displaying the Logging Status
From the global configuration mode, use the show logging command.
160
Enterprise AP#show logging
Logging Information
============================================
Syslog State
: Enabled
Logging Console State
: Enabled
Logging Level
: Alert
Logging Facility Type
: 16
Servers
1: 192.168.1.19, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled
2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
=============================================
Enterprise AP#
4.5.3.0.2
CLI Commands for Displaying Event Logs
To view the access point log entries, use the show event-log command from the
Exec mode. To clear all log entries from the access point, use the logging clear
command from the Global Configuration mode.
Enterprise AP#show event-log
Mar 09 11:57:55 Information:
Mar 09 11:57:55 Information:
Mar 09 11:57:34 Information:
Mar 09 11:57:18 Information:
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information:
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information:
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information:
Press  next. 
 previous.
Enterprise AP#configure
Enter configuration commands,
Enterprise AP(config)#logging
Enterprise AP#
122
161
802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
802.11g:Radio channel updated to 8
802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
SSH task: Set SSH server port to 22
SSH task: Enable SSH server.
Enable Telnet.
 abort.  continue to end :
one per line. End with CTRL/Z
clear
160
Operation
5
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
In This Chapter:
„ “Using the Command Line Interface” on page 125
„ “Entering Commands” on page 127
„ “Command Groups” on page 132
„ “General Commands” on page 134
„ “System Management Commands” on page 139
„ “System Logging Commands” on page 157
„ “System Clock Commands” on page 162
„ “DHCP Relay Commands” on page 166
„ “SNMP Commands” on page 168
„ “Flash/File Commands” on page 181
„ “RADIUS Client” on page 185
„ “802.1X Authentication” on page 191
„ “MAC Address Authentication” on page 194
„ “Filtering Commands” on page 198
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
„ “WDS Bridge Commands” on page 202
„ “Spanning Tree Commands” on page 203
„ “Ethernet Interface Commands” on page 204
„ “Wireless Interface Commands” on page 209
„ “Rogue AP Detection Commands” on page 226
„ “Wireless Security Commands” on page 230
„ “Link Integrity Commands” on page 238
„ “IAPP Commands” on page 241
„ “VLAN Commands” on page 242
„ “WMM Commands” on page 245
124
Operation
Using the Command Line Interface
5.1
Using the Command Line Interface
5.1.1
Accessing the CLI
When accessing the management interface over a direct connection to the console
port, or via a Telnet connection, the Access Point (AP) unit can be managed by
entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using AP’s
command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX
system.
5.1.2
Console Connection
To access the Wi2 through the console port:
At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user
name is admin and the default password is smcadmin.) When the user name is
entered, the CLI displays the Enterprise AP# prompt.
Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
When finished, exit the session with the “exit” command.
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen is
displayed:
Username: admin
Password:
Enterprise AP#
CAUTION
Command examples shown later in this chapter abbreviate the console prompt to “AP” for simplicity.
5.1.3
Telnet Connection
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your
management station and any network device you want to manage over the
network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers,
0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and
host portion. For example, if the AP cannot acquire an IP address from a DHCP
server, the default IP address used by the AP, 192.168.1.1, consists of a network
portion (192.168.1) and a host portion (1).
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
125
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
To access the AP through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for
the AP, and set the default gateway if you are managing the AP from a different IP
subnet. For example:
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP#configure
AP(config)#interface ethernet
AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 10.1.0.1 255.255.255.0 10.1.0.254
AP(if-ethernet)#
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to
the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches
the network segment to which you are attached.
After you have configured the AP with an IP address, you can open a Telnet
session.
To open an Telnet session:
From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the
device you want to access.
At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display
the Enterprise AP# prompt to show that you are using executive access mode
(i.e., Exec).
Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen is displayed:
Username: admin
Password:
Enterprise AP#
CAUTION
You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.
126
Operation
Entering Commands
5.2
Entering Commands
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.
5.2.1
Keywords and Arguments
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a
command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the
command “show interfaces ethernet,” show and interfaces are keywords, and
ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type.
You can enter commands as follows:
„ To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.
„ To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters
after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the
administrator, enter:
Enterprise AP(config)#username smith
5.2.2
Minimum Abbreviation
The CLI accepts a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a
command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.
5.2.3
Command Completion
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters
of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “configure” example,
typing con followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to
“configure.”
5.2.4
Getting Help on Commands
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help
command. You can also display command syntax by following a command with
the “?” character to list keywords or parameters.
5.2.4.1
Showing Commands
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of
keywords for the current configuration mode (Exec, Global Configuration, or
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
127
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Interface). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command.
For example, the command “show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:
Enterprise AP#show ?
APmanagement
Show management AP information.
authentication Show Authentication parameters
bootfile
Show bootfile name
config
System snapshot for tech support
dhcp-relay
Show DHCP Relay Configuration
event-log
Show event log on console
filters
Show filters
hardware
Show hardware version
history
Display the session history
interface
Show interface information
line
TTY line information
link-integrity Show link integrity information
logging
Show the logging buffers
radius
Show radius server
rogue-ap
Show Rogue ap Stations
snmp
Show snmp configuration
sntp
Show sntp configuration
station
Show 802.11 station table
system
Show system information
version
Show system version
Enterprise AP#show
The command “show interface ?” will display the following information:
Enterprise AP#show interface ?
ethernet Show Ethernet interface
wireless Show wireless interface

Enterprise AP#show interface
5.2.5
Partial Keyword Lookup
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match
the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the
command and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting
with “s.”
Enterprise AP#show s?
snmp
sntp
station
Enterprise AP#show s
5.2.6
system
Negating the Effect of Commands
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to
cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For
example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To
disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the
negation effect for all applicable commands.
128
Operation
Entering Commands
5.2.7
Using Command History
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll
back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any
command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and
then executed.
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed
commands.
5.2.8
Understanding Command Modes
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands
generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or
enable certain functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.
Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for
the current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in
Table 5-1:
Table 5-1: Command Classes and Associated Modes
Class
Mode
Exec
Privileged
Configuration
Global
Interface-ethernet
Interface-wireless
Interface-wireless-vap
5.2.9
Exec Commands
When you open a new console session on an AP, the system enters Exec command
mode. Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode. You
can access all other commands only from the configuration mode. To access Exec
mode, open a new console session with the user name admin. The command
prompt displays as Enterprise AP# for Exec mode.
Username: admin
Password: [system login password]
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
129
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.2.10 Configuration Commands
Configuration commands are used to modify AP settings. These commands modify
the running configuration and are saved in memory.
The configuration commands are organized into four different modes:
„ Global Configuration (GC) - These commands modify the system level
configuration, and include commands such as username and password.
„ Interface-Ethernet Configuration (IC-E) - These commands modify the
Ethernet port configuration, and include command such as dns and ip.
„ Interface-Wireless Configuration (IC-W) - These commands modify the wireless
port configuration of global parameters for the radio, and include commands
such as channel and transmit-power.
„ Interface-Wireless Virtual Access Point Configuration (IC-W-VAP) - These
commands modify the wireless port configuration for each VAP, and include
commands such as ssid and authentication.
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Exec
mode. The system prompt will change to “Enterprise AP(config)#” which gives you
access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.
Enterprise AP#configure
Enterprise AP(config)#
To enter Interface mode, you must enter the “interface ethernet,” or “interface
wireless a,” or “interface wireless g” command while in Global Configuration
mode. The system prompt will change to “Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#,” or
Enterprise AP(if-wireless)” indicating that you have access privileges to the
associated commands. You can use the end command to return to the Exec mode.
Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.2.11 Command Line Processing
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters
as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other
currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to
complete partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?”
130
Operation
Entering Commands
character to display a list of possible matches. You can also use the following
editing keystrokes for command-line processing:
Table 5-2: Keystroke Commands
Keystroke
Function
Ctrl-A
Shifts cursor to start of command line.
Ctrl-B
Shifts cursor to the left one character.
Ctrl-C
Terminates a task and displays the command prompt.
Ctrl-E
Shifts cursor to end of command line.
Ctrl-F
Shifts cursor to the right one character.
Ctrl-K
Deletes from cursor to the end of the command line.
Ctrl-L
Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-N
Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Ctrl-P
Shows the last command.
Ctrl-R
Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-U
Deletes the entire line.
Ctrl-W
Deletes the last word typed.
Esc-B
Moves the cursor backward one word.
Esc-D
Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.
Esc-F
Moves the cursor forward one word.
Delete key or
backspace key
Erases a mistake when entering a command.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
131
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.3
Command Groups
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown
below.
Table 5-3: Command Group
Command Group
Description
Page
General
Basic commands for entering configuration mode, restarting the system, or
quitting the CLI
134
System Management
Controls user name, password, web browser management options, and a
variety of other system information
139
System Logging
Configures system logging parameters
157
System Clock
Configures SNTP and system clock settings
162
DHCP Relay
Configures the AP to send DHCP requests from clients to specified servers
166
SNMP
Configures community access strings and trap managers
168
Flash/File
Manages code image or AP configuration files
181
RADIUS
Configures the RADIUS client used with 802.1X authentication
184
802.1X Authentication
Configures 802.1X authentication
191
MAC Address
Authentication
Configures MAC address authentication
194
Filtering
Filters communications between wireless clients, controls access to the
management interface from wireless clients, and filters traffic using specific
Ethernet protocol types
198
WDS Bridge
Not applicable for the current release
202
Spanning Tree
Not applicable for the current release
203
Ethernet Interface
Configures connection parameters for the Ethernet interface
204
Wireless Interface
Configures radio interface settings
209
Wireless Security
Configures radio interface security and encryption settings
226
Rogue AP Detection
Configures settings for the detection of rogue APs in the network
226
Link Integrity
Configures a link check to a host device on the wired network
238
IAPP
Enables roaming between multi-vendor APs
241
VLANs
Configures VLAN membership
242
WMM
Configures WMM quality of service parameters
245
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:
Exec (Executive Mode), GC (Global Configuration), IC-E (Interface-Ethernet
132
Operation
Command Groups
Configuration), IC-W (Interface-Wireless Configuration), and IC-W-VAP
(Interface-Wireless VAP Configuration).
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
133
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.4
General Commands
Table 5-4: General Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
configure
Activates global configuration mode
Exec
135
end
Returns to previous configuration mode
GC, IC
135
exit
Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI
any
135
ping
Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network
Exec
136
reset
Restarts the system
Exec
136
show history
Shows the command history buffer
Exec
137
show line
Shows the configuration settings for the console port
Exec
137
134
Operation
General Commands
5.4.1
configure
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to
modify most of the settings on the AP. You must also enter Global Configuration
mode prior to enabling the context modes for Interface Configuration. see “Using
the Command Line Interface” on page 5-125.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#configure
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
end (page 135)
5.4.2
end
This command returns to the previous configuration mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration
Example
This example shows how to return to the Configuration mode from the Interface
Configuration mode:
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#end
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.4.3
exit
This command returns to the Exec mode or exits the configuration program.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
135
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Any
Example
This example shows how to return to the Exec mode from the Interface
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#exit
Enterprise AP#exit
CLI session with the Access Point is now closed
Username:
5.4.4
ping
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.
Syntax
ping 
• host_name - Alias of the host.
• ip_address - IP address of the host.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.
• The following are some results of the ping command:
- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds, depending on network
traffic.
- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout” appears in ten
seconds.
- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is
unreachable.
- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table.
• Press  to stop pinging.
Example
Enterprise AP#ping 10.1.0.19
192.168.1.19 is alive
Enterprise AP#
5.4.5
reset
This command restarts the system or restores the factory default settings.
136
Operation
General Commands
Syntax
reset 
• board - Reboots the system.
• configuration - Resets the configuration settings to the factory defaults, and then reboots the
system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test.
Example
This example shows how to reset the system:
Enterprise AP#reset board
Reboot system now? : y
5.4.6
show history
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• The history buffer size is fixed at 10 commands.
• Use the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the commands in the history buffer.
Example
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command
history buffer:
Enterprise AP#show history
config
exit
show history
Enterprise AP#
5.4.7
show line
This command displays the console port’s configuration settings.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
137
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
The console port settings are fixed at the values shown below.
Enterprise AP#show line
Console Line Information
======================================================
databits
: 8
parity
: none
speed
: 9600
stop bits : 1
======================================================
Enterprise AP#
138
Operation
System Management Commands
5.5
System Management Commands
These commands are used to configure the user name, password, system logs,
browser management options, clock settings, and a variety of other system
information.
Table 5-5: System Management Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
Sets the AP country code
Exec
140
prompt
Customizes the command line prompt
GC
141
system name
Specifies the host name for the AP
GC
142
snmp-server contact
Sets the system contact string
GC
169
snmp-server location
Sets the system location string
GC
169
username
Configures the user name for management access
GC
142
password
Specifies the password for management access
GC
143
ip ssh-server enable
Enables the Secure Shell server
IC-E
143
ip ssh-server port
Sets the Secure Shell port
IC-E
144
ip telnet-server enable
Enables the Telnet server
IC-E
144
APmgmtIP
Specifies an IP address or range of addresses allowed access to
the management interface
GC
147
APmgmtUI
Enables or disables SNMP, Telnet or web management access
GC
148
show APmanagement
Shows the AP management configuration
Exec
148
ip http port
Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface
GC
144
ip http server
Allows the AP to be monitored or configured from a browser
GC
145
ip http session-timeout
Sets the timeout for the web browser interface
GC
145
ip https port
Specifies the UDP port number used for a secure HTTP
connection to the AP’s Web interface
GC
146
ip https server
Enables the secure HTTP server on the AP
GC
146
show system
Displays system information
Exec
149
show version
Displays version information for the system
Exec
150
Country Setting
country
Device Designation
Management Access
Web Server
System Status
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
139
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Table 5-5: System Management Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
show config
Displays detailed configuration information for the system
Exec
151
show hardware
Displays the AP’s hardware version
Exec
156
5.5.1
country
This command configures the AP’s country code, which identifies the country of
operation and sets the authorized radio channels.
Syntax
country 
country_code - A two character code that identifies the country of operation. See the following
table for a full list of codes.
Table 5-6: Country Codes
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Country
Code
Albania
AL
Dominican
Republic
DO
Kuwait
KW
Romania
RO
Algeria
DZ
Ecuador
EC
Latvia
LV
Russia
RU
Argentina
AR
Egypt
EG
Lebanon
LB
Saudi Arabia
SA
Armenia
AM
Estonia
EE
Liechtenstein
LI
Singapore
SG
Australia
AU
Finland
FI
Lithuania
LT
Slovak Republic
SK
Austria
AT
France
FR
Macao
MO
Spain
ES
Azerbaijan
AZ
Georgia
GE
Macedonia
MK
Sweden
SE
Bahrain
BH
Germany
DE
Malaysia
MY
Switzerland
CH
Belarus
BY
Greece
GR
Malta
MT
Syria
SY
Belgium
BE
Guatemala
GT
Mexico
MX
Taiwan
TW
Honduras
HN
Monaco
MC
Thailand
TH
Belize
BZ
Hong Kong
HK
Morocco
MA
Trinidad &
Tobago
TT
Bolivia
BO
Hungary
HU
Netherlands
NL
Tunisia
TN
Brazil
BR
Iceland
IS
New Zealand
NZ
Turkey
TR
Brunei
Darussalam
BN
India
IN
Norway
NO
Ukraine
UA
Bulgaria
BG
Indonesia
ID
Qatar
QA
United Arab
Emirates
AE
Canada
CA
Iran
IR
Oman
OM
United Kingdom
GB
140
Operation
System Management Commands
Table 5-6: Country Codes
Chile
CL
Ireland
IE
Pakistan
PK
United States
US
China
CN
Israel
IL
Panama
PA
Uruguay
UY
Colombia
CO
Italy
IT
Peru
PE
Uzbekistan
UZ
Costa Rica
CR
Japan
JP
Philippines
PH
Yemen
YE
Croatia
HR
Jordan
JO
Poland
PL
Venezuela
VE
Cyprus
CY
Kazakhstan
KZ
Portugal
PT
Vietnam
VN
Czech
Republic
CZ
North Korea
KP
Puerto Rico
PR
Zimbabwe
ZW
Denmark
DK
Korea
Republic
KR
Slovenia
SI
Elsalvador
SV
Luxembourg
LU
South Africa
ZA
Default Setting
US - for units sold in the United States
99 (no country set) - for units sold in other countries
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• If you purchased an AP outside of the United States, the country code must be set before radio
functions are enabled.
• The available Country Code settings can be displayed by using the country ? command.
Example
Enterprise AP#country tw
Enterprise AP#
5.5.2
prompt
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default
prompt.
Syntax
prompt 
no prompt
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
141
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
Enterprise AP
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#prompt RD2
RD2(config)#
5.5.3
system name
This command specifies or modifies the system name for this device. Use the no
form to restore the default system name.
Syntax
system name 
no system name
name - The name of this host.
(Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
Enterprise AP
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#system name AP
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.4
username
This command configures the user name for management access.
Syntax
username 
name - The name of the user.
(Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive)
142
Operation
System Management Commands
Default Setting
admin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#username bob
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.5
password
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the password. Remember to
record it in a safe place. Use the no form to reset the default password.
Syntax
password 
no password
password - Password for management access.
(Length: 3-16 characters, case sensitive)
Default Setting
smcadmin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#password
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.6
ip ssh-server enable
This command enables the Secure Shell server. Use the no form to disable the
server.
Syntax
ip ssh-server enable
no ip ssh-server
Default Setting
Interface enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
„ The AP supports Secure Shell version 2.0 only.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
143
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
„ After boot up, the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host
encryption keys. The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being
generated. The show system command displays the status of the SSH server.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server enable
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.5.7
ip ssh-server port
This command sets the Secure Shell server port. Use the no form to disable the
server.
Syntax
ip ssh-server port 
• port-number - The UDP port used by the SSH server. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
22
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip ssh-server port 1124
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.5.8
ip telnet-server enable
This command enables the Telnet server. Use the no form to disable the server.
Syntax
ip telnet-server enable
no ip telnet-server
Default Setting
Interface enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip telnet-server enable
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.5.9
ip http port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.
Use the no form to use the default port.
144
Operation
System Management Commands
Syntax
ip http port 
no ip http port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface. (Range: 1024-65535)
Default Setting
80
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#ip http port 769
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
ip http server (page 145)
5.5.10 ip http server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser.
Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
ip http server
no ip http server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#ip http server
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
ip http port (page 144)
5.5.11 ip http session-timeout
This command sets the time limit for an idle web interface session.
Syntax
ip http session-timeout 
time - Sets the web interface session timeout.
(Range: 0 - 1800 seconds, 0 means disabled)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
145
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#ip http session-timeout 0
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
ip http port (page 144)
5.5.12 ip https port
Use this command to specify the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL
connection to the AP’s Web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.
Syntax
ip https port 
no ip https port
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.
(Range: 80, 1024-65535)
Default Setting
443
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.
• To avoid using common reserved TCP port numbers below 1024, the configurable range is
restricted to 443 and between 1024 and 65535.
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must
specify the port number in the URL, in this format:
https://device:port_number
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#ip https port 1234
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.13 ip https server
Use this command to enable the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted
connection) to the AP’s Web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.
146
Operation
System Management Commands
Syntax
ip https server
no ip https server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL:
https://device:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#ip https server
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.14 APmgmtIP
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the AP through various protocols.
CAUTION
Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management
settings.
Syntax
APmgmtIP 
•
•
•
•
•
multiple - Adds IP addresses within a specifiable range to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
single - Adds an IP address to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
any - Allows any IP address access through SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
IP_address - Adds IP addresses to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
subnet_mask - Specifies a range of IP addresses allowed management access.
Default Setting
All addresses
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the AP from an invalid address, the unit will reject
the connection, enter an event message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap
manager.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
147
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each of these groups
can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the AP will not accept
overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for different groups, the AP will accept
overlapping address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete the entire range, and
reenter the addresses.
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start
address and end address.
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtip multiple 192.168.1.50 255.255.255.0
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.15 APmgmtUI
This command enables and disables management access to the AP through
SNMP, Telnet and web interfaces.
CAUTION
Secure Web (HTTPS) connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management
settings.
Syntax
APmgmtUI <[SNMP | Telnet | Web] enable | disable>
• SNMP - Specifies SNMP management access.
• Telnet - Specifies Telnet management access.
• Web - Specifies web based management access.
- enable/disable - Enables or disables the selected management access method.
Default Setting
All enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
Enterprise AP(config)#apmgmtui SNMP enable
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.5.16 show apmanagement
This command shows the AP management configuration, including the IP
addresses of management stations allowed to access the AP, as well as the
interface protocols which are open to management access.
148
Operation
System Management Commands
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show apmanagement
Management AP Information
=================================
AP Management IP Mode: Any IP
Telnet UI: Enable
WEB UI
: Enable
SNMP UI : Enable
==================================
Enterprise AP#
5.5.17 show system
This command displays basic system configuration settings.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
149
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show system
System Information
==========================================================
Serial Number
: A123456789
System Up time
: 0 days, 4 hours, 33 minutes, 29 seconds
System Name
: Enterprise wireless gP
System Location
System Contact
System Country Code
: US - UNITED STATES
MAC Address
: 00-30-F1-F0-9A-9C
IP Address
: 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 0.0.0.0
VLAN State
: DISABLED
Management VLAN ID(AP): 1
IAPP State
: ENABLED
DHCP Client
: ENABLED
HTTP Server
: ENABLED
HTTP Server Port
: 80
HTTPS Server
: ENABLED
HTTPS Server Port
: 443
Slot Status
: 802.11g only
Boot Rom Version
: v2.1.6
Software Version
: v4.3.3.8b02
SSH Server
: ENABLED
SSH Server Port
: 22
Telnet Server
: ENABLED
WEB Redirect
: DISABLED
DHCP Relay
: DISABLED
Proxy ARP
: DISABLED
==========================================================
Enterprise AP#
5.5.18 show version
This command displays the software version for the system.
150
Operation
System Management Commands
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show version
Version Information
=========================================
Version: v4.3.3.8b02
Date
: Dec 20 2005, 18:38:12
=========================================
Enterprise AP#
5.5.19 show config
This command displays detailed configuration information for the system.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
151
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show config
Authentication Information
===========================================================
MAC Authentication Server
: DISABLED
MAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min
802.1x supplicant
: DISABLED
802.1x supplicant user
: EMPTY
802.1x supplicant password
: EMPTY
Address Filtering
: ALLOWED
System Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.
Filter Table
----------------------------------------------------------No Filter Entries.
Bootfile Information
===================================
Bootfile : ec-img.bin
===================================
Protocol Filter Information
===========================================================
Local AP
:DISABLED
AP Management
:ENABLED
Ethernet Type Filter :DISABLED
Enabled Protocol Filters
----------------------------------------------------------No protocol filters are enabled
===========================================================
152
Operation
System Management Commands
Hardware Version Information
===========================================
Hardware version R01A
===========================================
Ethernet Interface Information
========================================
IP Address
: 192.168.0.151
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 192.168.0.1
Primary DNS
: 210.200.211.225
Secondary DNS
: 210.200.211.193
Speed-duplex
: 100Base-TX Full Duplex
Admin status
: Up
Operational status : Up
========================================
Wireless Interface 802.11g Information
===========================================================
----------------Identification----------------------------Description
: Enterprise 802.11g Access Point
SSID
: VAP_TEST_11G 0
Channel
: 0 (AUTO)
Status
: Disable
----------------802.11 Parameters-------------------------Transmit Power
: 100% (5 dBm)
Data Rate
: 54Mbps
Fragmentation Threshold
: 2346 bytes
RTS Threshold
: 2347 bytes
Beacon Interval
: 100 TUs
DTIM Interval
: 1 beacon
Maximum Association
: 64 stations
Native VLAN ID
: 1
----------------Security----------------------------------Closed System
: DISABLED
Multicast cipher
: WEP
Unicast cipher
: TKIP and AES
WPA clients
: REQUIRED
WPA Key Mgmt Mode
: PRE SHARED KEY
WPA PSK Key Type
: ALPHANUMERIC
Encryption
: DISABLED
Default Transmit Key
: 1
Static Keys :
Key 1: EMPTY
Key 2: EMPTY
Key 3: EMPTY
Key 4: EMPTY
Key Length :
Key 1: ZERO
Key 2: ZERO
Key 3: ZERO
Key 4: ZERO
Authentication Type
: OPEN
Rogue AP Detection
: Disabled
Rogue AP Scan Interval
: 720 minutes
Rogue AP Scan Duration
: 350 milliseconds
===========================================================
Console Line Information
===========================================================
databits
: 8
parity
: none
speed
: 9600
stop bits : 1
===========================================================
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
153
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Logging Information
=====================================================
Syslog State
: Disabled
Logging Console State
: Disabled
Logging Level
: Informational
Logging Facility Type
: 16
Servers
1: 0.0.0.0
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
2: 0.0.0.0
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
3: 0.0.0.0
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
4: 0.0.0.0
, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
======================================================
Radius Server Information
========================================
IP
: 0.0.0.0
Port
: 1812
Key
: *****
Retransmit
: 3
Timeout
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Radius Secondary Server Information
========================================
IP
: 0.0.0.0
Port
: 1812
Key
: *****
Retransmit
: 3
Timeout
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
SNMP Information
==============================================
Service State
: Disable
Community (ro)
: ********
Community (rw)
: ********
Location
Contact
: Contact
EngineId
:80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:29:f6:00:00:00:0c
EngineBoots:2
Trap Destinations:
1:
0.0.0.0,
2:
0.0.0.0,
3:
0.0.0.0,
4:
0.0.0.0,
154
Community:
Community:
Community:
Community:
*****,
*****,
*****,
*****,
State:
State:
State:
State:
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Operation
System Management Commands
dot11InterfaceGFail
dot11StationAssociation
dot11StationReAssociation
dot1xAuthFail
dot1xAuthSuccess
dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess
iappStationRoamedFrom
localMacAddrAuthFail
pppLogonFail
configFileVersionChanged
systemDown
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
dot11InterfaceBFail
dot11StationAuthentication
dot11StationRequestFail
dot1xAuthNotInitiated
dot1xMacAddrAuthFail
iappContextDataSent
iappStationRoamedTo
localMacAddrAuthSuccess
sntpServerFail
radiusServerChanged
systemUp
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
=============================================
SNTP Information
===========================================================
Service State
: Disabled
SNTP (server 1) IP
: 137.92.140.80
SNTP (server 2) IP
: 192.43.244.18
Current Time
: 00 : 14, Jan 1st, 1970
Time Zone
: -5 (BOGOTA, EASTERN, INDIANA)
Daylight Saving
: Disabled
===========================================================
Station Table Information
===========================================================
if-wireless G VAP [0]
802.11g Channel : Auto
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
System Information
==============================================================
Serial Number
System Up time
: 0 days, 0 hours, 16 minutes, 51 seconds
System Name
: Enterprise wireless gP
System Location
System Contact
: Contact
System Country Code
: 99 - NO_COUNTRY_SET
MAC Address
: 00-12-CF-05-B7-84
IP Address
: 192.168.0.151
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 192.168.0.1
VLAN State
: DISABLED
Management VLAN ID(AP): 1
IAPP State
: ENABLED
DHCP Client
: ENABLED
HTTP Server
: ENABLED
HTTP Server Port
: 80
HTTPS Server
: ENABLED
HTTPS Server Port
: 443
Slot Status
: Single band
Boot Rom Version
: v2.1.6
Software Version
: v4.3.3.8b02
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
155
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
SSH Server
: ENABLED
SSH Server Port
: 22
Telnet Server
: ENABLED
WEB Redirect
: DISABLED
DHCP Relay
: DISABLED
==============================================================
Version Information
=========================================
Software Version
: v4.3.3.8b02
Date
: Nov 8 2006, 09:50:03
BootRom Version
: v2.1.6
Hardware version
: R-00
=========================================
Enterprise AP#
5.5.20 show hardware
This command displays the hardware version of the system.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show hardware
Hardware Version Information
===========================================
Hardware version R01
===========================================
Enterprise AP#
156
Operation
System Logging Commands
5.6
System Logging Commands
These commands are used to configure system logging on the AP.
Table 5-7: System Logging Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
logging on
Controls logging of error messages
GC
157
logging host
Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive
logging messages
GC
157
logging console
Initiates logging of error messages to the console
GC
158
logging level
Defines the minimum severity level for event logging
GC
158
logging facility-type
Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages
GC
159
logging clear
Clears all log entries in AP memory
GC
160
show logging
Displays the state of logging
Exec
160
show event-log
Displays all log entries in AP memory
Exec
161
5.6.1
logging on
This command controls logging of error messages; i.e., sending debug or error
messages to memory. The no form disables the logging process.
Syntax
[no] logging on
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The logging process controls error messages saved to memory. You can use the logging level
command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#logging on
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.6.2
logging host
This command specifies syslog servers host that will receive logging messages.
Use the no form to remove syslog server host.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
157
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4>  [udp_port]
no logging host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4>
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 - First syslog server.
2 - Second syslog server.
3 - Third syslog server.
4 - Fourth syslog server.
host_name - The name of a syslog server. (Range: 1-20 characters)
host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.
udp_port - The UDP port used by the syslog server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#logging host 1 10.1.0.3
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.6.3
logging console
This command initiates logging of error messages to the console. Use the no form
to disable logging to the console.
Syntax
logging console
no logging console
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#logging console
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.6.4
logging level
This command sets the minimum severity level for event logging.
158
Operation
System Logging Commands
Syntax
logging level 
Default Setting
Informational
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Messages sent include the selected level down to Emergency level.
Level Argument
Description
Emergency
System unusable
Alert
Immediate action needed
Critical
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource
exhausted)
Error
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
Warning
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
Notice
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
Informational
Informational messages only
Debug
Debugging messages
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#logging level alert
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.6.5
logging facility-type
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.
Syntax
logging facility-type 
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages
to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
159
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
16
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC 3164.) This type
has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the AP. However, it may be used by the syslog
server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#logging facility 19
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.6.6
logging clear
This command clears all log messages stored in the AP’s memory.
Syntax
logging clear
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#logging clear
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.6.7
show logging
This command displays the logging configuration.
160
Operation
System Logging Commands
Syntax
show logging
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show logging
Logging Information
============================================
Syslog State
: Enabled
Logging Console State
: Enabled
Logging Level
: Alert
Logging Facility Type
: 16
Servers
1: 192.168.1.19, UDP Port: 514, State: Enabled
2: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
3: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
4: 0.0.0.0, UDP Port: 514, State: Disabled
=============================================
Enterprise AP#
5.6.8
show event-log
This command displays log messages stored in the AP’s memory.
Syntax
show event-log
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show event-log
Mar 09 11:57:55 Information:
Mar 09 11:57:55 Information:
Mar 09 11:57:34 Information:
Mar 09 11:57:18 Information:
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information:
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information:
Mar 09 11:55:52 Information:
Press  next. 
 previous.
Enterprise AP#configure
Enter configuration commands,
Enterprise AP(config)#logging
802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
802.11g:Radio channel updated to 8
802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
802.11g:11g Radio Interface Enabled
SSH task: Set SSH server port to 22
SSH task: Enable SSH server.
Enable Telnet.
 abort.  continue to end :
one per line. End with CTRL/Z
clear
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
161
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.7
System Clock Commands
These commands are used to configure SNTP and system clock settings on the AP.
Table 5-8: System Clock Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
sntp-server ip
Specifies one or more time servers
GC
162
sntp-server enable
Accepts time from the specified time servers
GC
163
sntp-server date-time
Manually sets the system date and time
GC
163
sntp-server
daylight-saving
Sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time
GC
164
sntp-server timezone
Sets the time zone for the AP’s internal clock
GC
164
show sntp
Shows current SNTP configuration settings
Exec
165
5.7.1
sntp-server ip
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are
issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from
the current list.
Syntax
sntp-server ip <1 | 2> 
• 1 - First time server.
• 2 - Second time server.
• ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP).
162
Operation
System Clock Commands
Default Setting
137.92.140.80
192.43.244.18
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
When SNTP client mode is enabled using the sntp-server enable command, the sntp-server ip
command specifies the time servers from which the AP polls for time updates. The AP will poll the
time servers in the order specified until a response is received.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server ip 10.1.0.19
Enterprise AP#
Related Commands
sntp-server enable (page 163)
show sntp (page 165)
5.7.2
sntp-server enable
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization with NTP or
SNTP time servers specified by the sntp-server ip command. Use the no form to
disable SNTP client requests.
Syntax
sntp-server enable
no sntp-server enable
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events.
Without SNTP, the AP only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup
(i.e., 00:14:00, January 1, 1970).
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server enable
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
sntp-server ip (page 162)
show sntp (page 165)
5.7.3
sntp-server date-time
This command sets the system clock.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
163
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
00:14:00, January 1, 1970
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
This example sets the system clock to 17:37 June 19, 2003.
Enterprise AP#sntp-server date-time
Enter Year<1970-2100>: 2003
Enter Month<1-12>: 6
Enter Day<1-31>: 19
Enter Hour<0-23>: 17
Enter Min<0-59>: 37
Enterprise AP#
Related Commands
sntp-server enable (page 163)
5.7.4
sntp-server daylight-saving
This command sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time. Use the no
form to disable daylight savings time.
Syntax
sntp-server daylight-saving
no sntp-server daylight-saving
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The command sets the system clock back one hour during the specified period.
Example
This sets daylight savings time to be used from July 1st to September 1st.
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server daylight-saving
Enter Daylight saving from which month<1-12>: 6
and which day<1-31>: 1
Enter Daylight saving end to which month<1-12>: 9
and which day<1-31>: 1
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.7.5
sntp-server timezone
This command sets the time zone for the AP’s internal clock.
164
Operation
System Clock Commands
Syntax
sntp-server timezone 
hours - Number of hours before/after UTC.
(Range: -12 to +12 hours)
Default Setting
-5 (BOGOTA, EASTERN, INDIANA)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC, formerly
Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To
display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and
minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#sntp-server timezone +8
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.7.6
show sntp
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP
client.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show sntp
SNTP Information
=========================================================
Service State
: Enabled
SNTP (server 1) IP
: 137.92.140.80
SNTP (server 2) IP
: 192.43.244.18
Current Time
: 08 : 04, Jun 20th, 2003
Time Zone
: +8 (TAIPEI, BEIJING)
Daylight Saving
: Enabled, from Jun, 1st to Sep, 1st
=========================================================
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
165
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.8
DHCP Relay Commands
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can dynamically allocate an IP
address and other configuration information to network clients that broadcast a
request. To receive the broadcast request, the DHCP server would normally have
to be on the same subnet as the client. However, when the AP’s DHCP relay agent
is enabled, received client requests can be forwarded directly by the AP to a known
DHCP server on another subnet. Responses from the DHCP server are returned to
the AP, which then broadcasts them back to clients.
Table 5-9: DHCP Relay Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
dhcp-relay enable
Enables the DHCP relay agent
GC
166
dhcp-relay
Sets the primary and secondary DHCP server address
GC
166
show dhcp-relay
Shows current DHCP relay configuration settings
Exec
167
5.8.1
dhcp-relay enable
This command enables the AP’s DHCP relay agent. Use the no form to disable the
agent.
Syntax
[no] dhcp-relay enable
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• For the DHCP relay agent to function, the primary DHCP server must be configured using the
dhcp-relay primary command. A secondary DHCP server does not need to be configured, but it is
recommended.
• If there is no response from the primary DHCP server, and a secondary server has been configured,
the agent will then attempt to send DHCP requests to the secondary server.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#dhcp-relay enable
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.8.2
dhcp-relay
This command configures the primary and secondary DHCP server addresses.
166
Operation
DHCP Relay Commands
Syntax
dhcp-relay  
• primary - The primary DHCP server.
• secondary - The secondary DHCP server.
• ip_address - IP address of the server.
Default Setting
Primary and secondary: 0.0.0.0
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#dhcp-relay primary 192.168.1.10
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.8.3
show dhcp-relay
This command displays the current DHCP relay configuration.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show dhcp-relay
DHCP Relay
: ENABLED
Primary DHCP Server
: 192.168.1.10
Secondary DHCP Server : 0.0.0.0
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
167
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.9
SNMP Commands
Controls access to this AP from management stations using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the hosts that will receive trap messages.
Table 5-10: SNMP Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
snmp-server community
Sets up the community access string to permit access to
SNMP commands
GC
168
snmp-server contact
Sets the system contact string
GC
169
snmp-server location
Sets the system location string
GC
169
snmp-server enable server
Enables SNMP service and traps
GC
170
snmp-server host
Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation
GC
170
snmp-server trap
Enables specific SNMP notifications
GC
171
snmp-server engine id
Sets the engine ID for SNMP v3
GC
172
snmp-server user
Sets the name of the SNMP v3 user
GC
173
snmp-server targets
Configures SNMP v3 notification targets
GC
174
snmp-server filter
Configures SNMP v3 notification filters
GC
174
snmp-server
filter-assignments
Assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets
GC
175
show snmp groups
Displays the pre-defined SNMP v3 groups
Exec
176
show snmp users
Displays SNMP v3 user settings
Exec
176
show snmp
group-assignments
Displays the assignment of users to SNMP v3 groups
Exec
177
show snmp target
Displays the SNMP v3 notification targets
Exec
177
show snmp filter
Displays the SNMP v3 notification filters
Exec
178
show snmp filter-assignments
Displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments
Exec
178
show snmp
Displays the status of SNMP communications
Exec
179
5.9.1
snmp-server community
This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network
Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community string.
Syntax
snmp-server community string [ro | rw]
no snmp-server community string
• string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol.
168
Operation
SNMP Commands
(Maximum length: 23 characters, case sensitive)
• ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB
objects.
• rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and
modify MIB objects.
Default Setting
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and
modify MIB objects.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
If you enter a community string without the ro or rw option, the default is read only.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.9.2
snmp-server contact
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the
system contact information.
Syntax
snmp-server contact string
no snmp-server contact
string - String that describes the system contact. (Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server contact Paul
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server location (page 169)
5.9.3
snmp-server location
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the
location string.
Syntax
snmp-server location 
no snmp-server location
text - String that describes the system location. (Maximum length: 255 characters)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
169
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server location WC-19
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server contact (page 169)
5.9.4
snmp-server enable server
This command enables SNMP management access and also enables this device to
send SNMP traps (i.e., notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP service and
trap messages.
Syntax
snmp-server enable server
no snmp-server enable server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command enables both authentication failure notifications and link-up-down notifications.
• The snmp-server host command specifies the host device that will receive SNMP notifications.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server enable server
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server host (page 170)
5.9.5
snmp-server host
This command specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification. Use the no form to
remove the specified host.
Syntax
snmp-server host <1 | 2 | 3 | 4>  
no snmp-server host
•
•
•
•
170
1 - First SNMP host.
2 - Second SNMP host.
3 - Third SNMP host.
4 - Fourth SNMP host.
Operation
SNMP Commands
• host_ip_address - IP of the host (the targeted recipient).
• host_name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-63 characters)
• community-string - Password-like community string sent with the notification operation. Although
you can set this string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you
define this string using the snmp-server community command prior to using the snmp-server
host command. (Maximum length: 23 characters)
Default Setting
Host Address: None
Community String: public
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server enable server
command to enable SNMP notifications.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server host 1 10.1.19.23 batman
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
snmp-server enable server (page 170)
5.9.6
snmp-server trap
This command enables the AP to send specific SNMP traps (i.e., notifications). Use
the no form to disable specific trap messages.
Syntax
snmp-server trap 
no snmp-server trap 
• trap - One of the following SNMP trap messages:
- dot11InterfaceGFail - The 802.11g interface has failed.
- dot11InterfaceBFail - The 802.11b interface has failed.
- dot11StationAssociation - A client station has successfully associated with the AP.
- dot11StationAuthentication - A client station has been successfully authenticated.
- dot11StationReAssociation - A client station has successfully re-associated with the AP.
- dot11StationRequestFail - A client station has failed association, re-association, or
authentication.
- dot1xAuthFail - A 802.1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication.
- dot1xAuthNotInitiated - A client station did not initiate 802.1X authentication.
- dot1xAuthSuccess - A 802.1X client station has been successfully authenticated by the
RADIUS server.
- dot1xMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed MAC address authentication with the
RADIUS server.
- dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC
address with the RADIUS server.
- iappContextDataSent - A client station’s Context Data has been sent to another AP with
which the station has associated.
- iappStationRoamedFrom - A client station has roamed from another AP (identified by its IP
address).
- iappStationRoamedTo - A client station has roamed to another AP (identified by its IP
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
171
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
address).
- localMacAddrAuthFail - A client station has failed authentication with the local MAC address
database on the AP.
- localMacAddrAuthSuccess - A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address
with the local database on the AP.
- pppLogonFail - The AP has failed to log onto the PPPoE server using the configured user
name and password.
- sntpServerFail - The AP has failed to set the time from the configured SNTP server.
- sysConfigFileVersionChanged - The AP’s configuration file has been changed.
- sysRadiusServerChanged - The AP has changed from the primary RADIUS server to the
secondary, or from the secondary to the primary.
- sysSystemDown - The AP is about to shutdown and reboot.
- sysSystemUp - The AP is up and running.
Default Setting
All traps enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host and snmp-server enable
server commands to enable SNMP notifications.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#no snmp-server trap dot11StationAssociation
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.9.7
snmp-server engine-id
This command is used for SNMP v3. It is used to uniquely identify the AP among
all APs in the network. Use the no form to delete the engine ID.
Syntax
snmp-server engine-id 
no snmp-server engine-id
engine-id - Enter engine-id in hexadecimal (5-32 characters).
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server user command.
• Entering this command invalidates all engine IDs that have been previously configured.
• If the engine ID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to
reconfigure all existing users
172
Operation
SNMP Commands
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server engine-id 1a:2b:3c:4d:00:ff
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.9.8
snmp-server user
This command configures the SNMP v3 users that are allowed to manage the AP.
Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 user.
Syntax
snmp-server user 
user-name - A user-defined string for the SNMP user. (32 characters maximum)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Up to 10 SNMPv3 users can be configured on the AP.
• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests from the pass phrase.
You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp-server engine-id command before
using this configuration command.
• The AP enables SNMP v3 users to be assigned to three pre-defined groups. Other groups cannot
be defined. The available groups are:
- RO - A read-only group using no authentication and no data encryption. Users in this group
use no security, either authentication or encryption, in SNMP messages they send to the agent.
This is the same as SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c.
- RWAuth - A read/write group using authentication, but no data encryption. Users in this group
send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/password for authentication, but not a DES
key/password for encryption.
- RWPriv - A read/write group using authentication and data encryption. Users in this group send
SNMP messages that use an MD5 key/password for authentication and a DES key/password
for encryption. Both the MD5 and DES key/passwords must be defined.
• The command prompts for the following information to configure an SNMP v3 user:
- user-name - A user-defined string for the SNMP user. (32 characters maximum)
- group-name - The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned (32 characters
maximum). There are three pre-defined groups: RO, RWAuth, or RWPriv.
- auth-proto - The authentication type used for user authentication: md5 or none.
- auth-passphrase - The user password required when authentication is used (8 – 32
characters).
- priv-proto - The encryption type used for SNMP data encryption: des or none.
- priv-passphrase - The user password required when data encryption is used (8 – 32
characters).
• Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels. If a user who has “AuthPriv”
security (uses authentication and encryption) is assigned to a read-only (RO) group, the user will
not be able to access the database. An AuthPriv user must be assigned to the RWPriv group with
the AuthPriv security level.
• To configure a user for the RWAuth group, you must include the auth-proto and auth-passphrase
keywords.
• To configure a user for the RWPriv group, you must include the auth-proto, auth-passphrase,
priv-proto, and priv-passphrase keywords.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
173
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server user
User Name<1-32> :chris
Group Name<1-32> :RWPriv
Authtype(md5,none):md5
Passphrase<8-32>:a good secret
Privacy(des,none) :des
Passphrase<8-32>:a very good secret
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.9.9
snmp-server targets
This command configures SNMP v3 notification targets. Use the no form to delete
an SNMP v3 target.
Syntax
snmp-server targets   
[version {3}] [udp-port {port-number}] [notification-type
{TRAP}]
no snmp-server targets 
• target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications. (Maximum length:
32 characters)
• ip-addr - Specifies the IP address of the management station to receive notifications.
• sec-name - The defined SNMP v3 user name that is to receive notifications.
• version - The SNMP version of notifications. Currently only version 3 is supported in this
command.
• udp-port - The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notifications.
• notification-type - The type of notification that is sent. Currently only TRAP is supported.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The AP supports up to 10 SNMP v3 target IDs.
• The SNMP v3 user name that is specified in the target must first be configured using the
snmp-server user command.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server targets mytraps 192.168.1.33 chris
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.9.10 snmp-server filter
This command configures SNMP v3 notification filters. Use the no form to delete
an SNMP v3 filter or remove a subtree from a filter.
174
Operation
SNMP Commands
Syntax
snmp-server filter   
[mask {mask}]
no snmp-server filter  [subtree]
• filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
• include - Defines a filter type that includes objects in the MIB subtree.
• exclude - Defines a filter type that excludes objects in the MIB subtree.
• subtree - The part of the MIB subtree that is to be filtered.
• mask - An optional hexadecimal value bit mask to define objects in the MIB subtree.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The AP allows up to 10 notification filters to be created. Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB
subtree ID entries.
• Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes
multiple MIB objects. Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined.
• The MIB subtree must be defined in the form “.1.3.6.1” and always start with a “.”.
• The mask is a hexadecimal value with each bit masking the corresponding ID in the MIB subtree.
A “1” in the mask indicates an exact match and a “0” indicates a “wild card.” For example, a mask
value of 0xFFBF provides a bit mask “1111 1111 1011 1111.” If applied to the subtree
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23, the zero corresponds to the 10th subtree ID. When there are more subtree
IDs than bits in the mask, the mask is padded with ones.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter include .1
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter trapfilter exclude .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23
5.9.11 snmp-server filter-assignments
This command assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets. Use the no form to
remove an SNMP v3 filter assignment.
Syntax
snmp-server filter-assignments  
no snmp-server filter-assignments 
• target-id - A user-defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications. (Maximum length:
32 characters)
• filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
175
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#snmp-server filter-assignments mytraps trapfilter
Enterprise AP(config)#exit
Enterprise AP#show snmp target
Host ID
: mytraps
User
: chris
IP Address
: 192.168.1.33
UDP Port
: 162
=============================
Enterprise AP#show snmp filter-assignments
HostID
mytraps
FilterID
trapfilter
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.9.12 show snmp groups
This command displays the SNMP v3 pre-defined groups.
Syntax
show snmp groups
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp groups
GroupName
:RO
SecurityModel :USM
SecurityLevel :NoAuthNoPriv
GroupName
:RWAuth
SecurityModel :USM
SecurityLevel :AuthNoPriv
GroupName
:RWPriv
SecurityModel :USM
SecurityLevel :AuthPriv
Enterprise AP#
5.9.13 show snmp users
This command displays the SNMP v3 users and settings.
176
Operation
SNMP Commands
Syntax
show snmp users
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp users
=============================================
UserName
:chris
GroupName
:RWPriv
AuthType
:MD5
Passphrase:****************
PrivType
:DES
Passphrase:****************
=============================================
Enterprise AP#
5.9.14 show snmp group-assignments
This command displays the SNMP v3 user group assignments.
Syntax
show snmp group-assignments
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp group-assignments
GroupName
:RWPriv
UserName
:chris
Enterprise AP#
Enterprise AP#
5.9.15 show snmp target
This command displays the SNMP v3 notification target settings.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
177
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
show snmp target
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp target
Host ID
: mytraps
User
: chris
IP Address
: 192.168.1.33
UDP Port
: 162
=============================
Enterprise AP#
5.9.16 show snmp filter
This command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter settings.
Syntax
show snmp filter [filter-id]
• filter-id - A user-defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp filter
Filter: trapfilter
Type: include
Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1
Type: exclude
Subtree: iso.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.23
=============================
Enterprise AP#
5.9.17 show snmp filter-assignments
This command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments.
178
Operation
SNMP Commands
Syntax
show snmp filter-assignments
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp filter-assignments
HostID
mytraps
FilterID
trapfilter
Enterprise AP#
5.9.18 show snmp
This command displays the SNMP configuration settings.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
179
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show snmp
SNMP Information
==============================================
Service State
: Enable
Community (ro)
: *****
Community (rw)
: *****
Location
: WC-19
Contact
: Paul
EngineId
:80:00:07:e5:80:00:00:2e:62:00:00:00:18
EngineBoots:1
Trap Destinations:
1:
192.168.1.9,
2:
0.0.0.0,
3:
0.0.0.0,
4:
0.0.0.0,
Community:
Community:
Community:
Community:
*****,
*****,
*****,
*****,
State:
State:
State:
State:
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
dot11InterfaceGFail Enabled
dot11InterfaceBFail Enabled
dot11StationAssociation Enabled dot11StationAuthentication
Enabled
dot11StationReAssociation Enabled
dot11StationRequestFail
Enabled
dot1xAuthFail Enabled
dot1xAuthNotInitiated Enabled
dot1xAuthSuccess Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthFail Enabled
dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled
iappContextDataSent
Enabled
iappStationRoamedFrom Enabled
iappStationRoamedTo
Enabled
localMacAddrAuthFail Enabled
localMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled
pppLogonFail Enabled
sntpServerFail Enabled
configFileVersionChanged Enabled
radiusServerChanged
Enabled
systemDown Enabled
systemUp Enabled
=============================================
Enterprise AP#
180
Operation
Flash/File Commands
5.10
Flash/File Commands
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.
Table 5-11: Flash/File Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
bootfile
Specifies the file or image used to start up the system
GC
181
copy
Copies a code image or configuration between flash
memory and a FTP/TFTP server
Exec
181
delete
Deletes a file or code image
Exec
182
dir
Displays a list of files in flash memory
Exec
183
show bootfile
Displays the name of the current operation code file that
Exec
184
booted the system
5.10.1 bootfile
This command specifies the image used to start up the system.
Syntax
bootfile 
filename - Name of the image file.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be
a period (.), and the maximum length for file names is 32 characters. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z,
0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.
Example
Enterprise AP#bootfile -img.bin
Enterprise AP#
5.10.2 copy
This command copies a boot file, code image, or configuration file between the
AP’s flash memory and a FTP/TFTP server. When you save the configuration
settings to a file on a FTP/TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the AP
to restore system operation. The success of the file transfer depends on the
accessibility of the FTP/TFTP server and the quality of the network connection.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
181
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
copy  file
copy config 
•
•
•
•
ftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from an FTP server.
tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.
file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a flash memory file.
config - Keyword that allows you to upload the configuration file from flash memory.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.
• Only a configuration file can be uploaded to an FTP/TFTP server, but every type of file can be
downloaded to the AP.
• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name
should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the FTP/TFTP server is 255
characters or 32 characters for files on the AP. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the AP supports only two operation code files.
• The system configuration file must be named “syscfg” in all copy commands.
Example
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on
the TFTP server:
Enterprise AP#copy config tftp
TFTP Source file name:syscfg
TFTP Server IP:192.168.1.19
Enterprise AP#
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
Enterprise AP#copy tftp file
1. Application image
2. Config file
3. Boot block image
Select the type of download<1,2,3>:
TFTP Source file name:syscfg
TFTP Server IP:192.168.1.19
Enterprise AP#
[1]:2
5.10.3 delete
This command deletes a file or image.
Syntax
delete 
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.
182
Operation
Flash/File Commands
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
CAUTION
Beware of deleting application images from flash memory. At least one application image is required
in order to boot the AP. If there are multiple image files in flash memory, and the one used to boot
the AP is deleted, be sure you first use the bootfile command to update the application image file
booted at startup before you reboot the AP.
Example
This example shows how to delete the test.cfg configuration file from flash
memory.
Enterprise AP#delete test.cfg
Are you sure you wish to delete this file? :
Enterprise AP#
Related Commands
bootfile (page 181)
dir (page 183)
5.10.4 dir
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
183
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Command Mode
Exec
Command Usage
File information is shown below:
Column Heading
Description
File Name
The name of the file.
Type
(2) Operation Code and (5) Configuration file
File Size
The length of the file in bytes.
Example
The following example shows how to display all file information:
Enterprise AP#dir
File Name
-------------------------dflt-img.bin
syscfg
syscfg_bak
zz-img.bin
Type
---2
File Size
----------1044140
16860
16860
1044140
1048576 byte(s) available
Enterprise AP#
5.10.5 show bootfile
This command displays the name of the current operation code file that booted
the system.
Syntax
show snmp filter-assignments
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show bootfile
Bootfile Information
===================================
Bootfile : ec-img.bin
===================================
Enterprise AP#
184
Operation
RADIUS Client
5.11
RADIUS Client
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access for
RADIUS-aware devices to the network. An authentication server contains a
database of credentials, such as users names and passwords, for each wireless
client that requires access to the AP.
Table 5-12: RADIUS Client
Command
Function
Mode
Page
radius-server address
Specifies the RADIUS server
GC
185
radius-server port
Sets the RADIUS server network port
GC
186
radius-server key
Sets the RADIUS encryption key
GC
186
radius-server retransmit
Sets the number of retries
GC
186
radius-server timeout
Sets the interval between sending authentication
requests
GC
187
radius-server port-accounting
Sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port
GC
187
radius-server timeout-interim
Sets the interval between transmitting accounting
updates to the RADIUS server
GC
188
radius-server
radius-mac-format
Sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the
RADIUS server
GC
188
radius-server vlan-format
Sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the RADIUS
server
GC
189
show radius
Shows the current RADIUS settings
Exec
189
5.11.1 radius-server address
This command specifies the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] address 
• secondary - Secondary server.
• host_ip_address - IP address of server.
• host_name - Host name of server. (Range: 1-20 characters)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
185
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server address 192.168.1.25
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.2 radius-server port
This command sets the RADIUS server network port.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] port 
• secondary - Secondary server.
• port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1024-65535)
Default Setting
1812
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server port 181
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.3 radius-server key
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] key 
• secondary - Secondary server.
• key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces
in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
DEFAULT
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server key green
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.4 radius-server retransmit
This command sets the number of retries.
186
Operation
RADIUS Client
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] retransmit number_of_retries
• secondary - Secondary server.
• number_of_retries - Number of times the AP will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS
server. (Range: 1 - 30)
Default Setting
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.5 radius-server timeout
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to
the RADIUS server.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] timeout number_of_seconds
• secondary - Secondary server.
• number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the AP waits for a reply before resending a request.
(Range: 1-60)
Default Setting
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server timeout 10
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.6 radius-server port-accounting
This command sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] port-accounting 
• secondary - Secondary server. If secondary is not specified, then the AP assumes you are
configuring the primary RADIUS server.
• port_number - RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting messages.
(Range: 0 or 1024-65535)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
187
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
0 (disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When the RADIUS Accounting server UDP port is specified, a RADIUS accounting session is
automatically started for each user that is successfully authenticated to the AP.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server port-accounting 1813
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.7 radius-server timeout-interim
This command sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the
RADIUS server.
Syntax
radius-server [secondary] timeout-interim 
• secondary - Secondary server.
• number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the waits between transmitting accounting updates.
(Range: 60-86400)
Default Setting
3600
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The
• sends periodic accounting updates after every interim period until the user logs off and a “stop”
message is sent.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server timeout-interim 500
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.8 radius-server radius-mac-format
This command sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the RADIUS
server.
Syntax
radius-server radius-mac-format 
•
•
•
•
188
multi-colon - Enter MAC addresses in the form xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
multi-dash - Enter MAC addresses in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
no-delimiter - Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxxxxxxxx.
single-dash - Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxx-xxxxxx.
Operation
RADIUS Client
Default Setting
No delimiter
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server radius-mac-format multi-dash
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.9 radius-server vlan-format
This command sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server.
Syntax
radius-server vlan-format 
• hex - Enter VLAN IDs as a hexadecimal number.
• ascii - Enter VLAN IDs as an ASCII string.
Default Setting
Hex
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#radius-server vlan-format ascii
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.11.10 show radius
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
189
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show radius
Radius Server Information
========================================
IP
: 0.0.0.0
Port
: 1812
Key
: *****
Retransmit
: 3
Timeout
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Radius Secondary Server Information
========================================
IP
: 0.0.0.0
Port
: 1812
Key
: *****
Retransmit
: 3
Timeout
: 5
Radius MAC format : no-delimiter
Radius VLAN format : HEX
========================================
Enterprise AP#
190
Operation
802.1X Authentication
5.12
802.1X Authentication
The AP supports IEEE 802.1X access control for wireless clients. This control
feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802.1X
client application to submit user credentials for authentication. Client
authentication is then verified by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) before the AP grants client access to the network. The
802.1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and
static broadcast keys to wireless clients.
Table 5-13: 802.1X Authentication
Command
Function
Mode
Page
802.1x
Configures 802.1X as disabled, supported, or required
IC-W-VAP
191
802.1x broadcast-keyrefresh-rate
Sets the interval at which the primary broadcast keys are
refreshed for stations using 802.1X dynamic keying
IC-W-VAP
802.1x session-keyrefresh-rate
Sets the interval at which unicast session keys are
refreshed for associated stations using dynamic keying
IC-W-VAP
802.1x session-timeout
Sets the timeout after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated
IC-W-VAP
802.1x-supplicant enable
Enables the AP to operate as a 802.1X supplicant
GC
192
802.1x-supplicant user
Sets the supplicant user name and password for the AP
GC
192
show authentication
Shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the
address filter table
Exec
192
5.12.1 802.1x
This command configures 802.1X as optionally supported or as required for
wireless clients. Use the no form to disable 802.1X support.
Syntax
802.1x 
no 802.1x
• supported - Authenticates clients that initiate the 802.1X authentication process. Uses standard
802.11 authentication for all others.
• required - Requires 802.1X authentication for all clients.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When 802.1X is disabled, the AP does not support 802.1X authentication for any station. After
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
191
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
successful 802.11 association, each client is allowed to access the network.
• When 802.1X is supported, the AP supports 802.1X authentication only for clients initiating the
802.1X authentication process (i.e., the AP does NOT initiate 802.1X authentication). For stations
initiating 802.1X, only those stations successfully authenticated are allowed to access the
network. For those stations not initiating 802.1X, access to the network is allowed after successful
802.11 association.
• When 802.1X is required, the AP enforces 802.1X authentication for all 802.11 associated
stations. If 802.1X authentication is not initiated by the station, the AP will initiate authentication.
Only those stations successfully authenticated with 802.1X are allowed to access the network.
• 802.1X does not apply to the 10/100Base-TX port.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#802.1x supported
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.12.2 802.1x-supplicant enable
This command enables the AP to operate as an 802.1X supplicant for
authentication. Use the no form to disable 802.1X authentication of the AP.
Syntax
802.1x-supplicant enable
no 802.1x-supplicant
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
A user name and password must be configured first before the 802.1X supplicant feature can be
enabled.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#802.1x-supplicant enable
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.12.3 802.1x-supplicant user
This command sets the user name and password used for authentication of the
AP when operating as a 802.1X supplicant. Use the no form to clear the
supplicant user name and password.
Syntax
802.1x-supplicant user  
no 802.1x-supplicant user
• username - The AP name used for authentication to the network. (Range: 1-32 alphanumeric
characters)
• password - The MD5 password used for AP authentication. (Range: 1-32 alphanumeric
characters)
192
Operation
802.1X Authentication
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The AP currently only supports EAP-MD5 CHAP for 802.1X supplicant authentication.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#802.1x-supplicant user WA6102 dot1xpass
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.12.4 show authentication
This command shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the address
filter table.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show authentication
Authentication Information
===========================================================
MAC Authentication Server
: DISABLED
MAC Auth Session Timeout Value : 0 min
802.1x supplicant
: DISABLED
802.1x supplicant user
: EMPTY
802.1x supplicant password
: EMPTY
Address Filtering
: ALLOWED
System Default : ALLOW addresses not found in filter table.
Filter Table
MAC Address
Status
-------------------------00-70-50-cc-99-1a
DENIED
00-70-50-cc-99-1b
ALLOWED
=========================================================
Enterprise AP(config)#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
193
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.13
MAC Address Authentication
Use these commands to define MAC authentication on the AP. For local MAC
authentication, first define the default filtering policy using the address filter
default command. Then enter the MAC addresses to be filtered, indicating if they
are allowed or denied. For RADIUS MAC authentication, the MAC addresses and
filtering policy must be configured on the RADIUS server.
Table 5-14: MAC Address Authentication
Command
Function
Mode
Page
address filter default
Sets filtering to allow or deny listed addresses
GC
194
address filter entry
Enters a MAC address in the filter table
GC
195
address filter delete
Removes a MAC address from the filter table
GC
195
mac- authentication server
Sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote
options
GC
196
mac- authentication
session-timeout
Sets the interval at which associated clients will be
re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication
database
GC
196
show authentication
Shows all 802.1X authentication settings, as well as the
address filter table
Exec
192
5.13.1 address filter default
This command sets filtering to allow or deny listed MAC addresses.
Syntax
address filter default 
• allowed - Only MAC addresses entered as “denied” in the address filtering table are denied.
• denied - Only MAC addresses entered as “allowed” in the address filtering table are allowed.
194
Operation
MAC Address Authentication
Default
allowed
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter default denied
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
address filter entry (page 195)
802.1x-supplicant user (page 192)
5.13.2 address filter entry
This command enters a MAC address in the filter table.
Syntax
address filter entry  
• mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by
hyphens; e.g., 00-90-D1-12-AB-89.)
• allowed - Entry is allowed access.
• denied - Entry is denied access.
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Mode
• The AP supports up to 1024 MAC addresses.
• An entry in the address table may be allowed or denied access depending on the global setting
configured for the address entry default command.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter entry 00-70-50-cc-99-1a allowed
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
address filter default (page 194)
802.1x-supplicant user (page 192)
5.13.3 address filter delete
This command deletes a MAC address from the filter table.
Syntax
address filter delete 
mac-address - Physical address of client. (Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by
hyphens.)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
195
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#address filter delete 00-70-50-cc-99-1b
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
802.1x-supplicant user (page 192)
5.13.4 mac-authentication server
This command sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote options.
Use the no form to disable MAC address authentication.
Syntax
mac-authentication server [local | remote]
• local - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the local authentication database
during 802.11 association.
• remote - Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the RADIUS server during 802.1X
authentication.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication server remote
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
address filter entry (page 195)
radius-server address (page 185)
802.1x-supplicant user (page 192)
5.13.5 mac-authentication session-timeout
This command sets the interval at which associated clients will be
re-authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database. Use the no
form to disable reauthentication.
Syntax
mac-authentication session-timeout 
minutes - Re-authentication interval. (Range: 0-1440)
196
Operation
MAC Address Authentication
Default
0 (disabled)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#mac-authentication session-timeout 1
Enterprise AP(config)#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
197
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.14
Filtering Commands
The commands described in this section are used to filter communications
between wireless clients, control access to the management interface from
wireless clients, and filter traffic using specific Ethernet protocol types.
Table 5-15: Filtering Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
filter ap-manage
Prevents wireless clients from accessing the management
interface
GC
198
filter uplink enable
Ethernet port MAC address filtering
GC
198
filter uplink
Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table
GC
199
filter ethernet-type enable
Checks the Ethernet type for all incoming and outgoing
Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table
GC
199
filter ethernet-type protocol
Sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type
GC
200
show filters
Shows the filter configuration
Exec
201
5.14.1 filter ap-manage
This command prevents wireless clients from accessing the management interface
on the AP. Use the no form to disable this filtering.
Syntax
filter ap-manage
no filter ap-manage
Default
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#filter AP-manage
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.14.2 filter uplink enable
This command enables filtering of MAC addresses from the Ethernet port.
198
Operation
Filtering Commands
Syntax
[no] filter uplink enable
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#filter uplink enable
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.14.3 filter uplink
This command adds or deletes MAC addresses from the uplink filtering table.
Syntax
filter uplink  MAC address
MAC address - Specifies a MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
A maximum of four addresses can be added to the filtering table.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#filter uplink add 00-12-34-56-78-9a
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.14.4 filter ethernet-type enable
This command checks the Ethernet type on all incoming and outgoing Ethernet
packets against the protocol filtering table. Use the no form to disable this feature.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
199
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
filter ethernet-type enable
no filter ethernet-type enable
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is used in conjunction with the filter ethernet-type protocol command to
determine which Ethernet protocol types are to be filtered.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#filter ethernet-type enable
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
filter ethernet-type protocol (page 200)
5.14.5 filter ethernet-type protocol
This command sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type. Use the no form to disable
filtering for a specific Ethernet type.
Syntax
filter ethernet-type protocol 
no filter ethernet-type protocol 
protocol - An Ethernet protocol type. (Options: ARP, RARP, Berkeley-Trailer-Negotiation,
LAN-Test, X25-Level-3, Banyan, CDP, DEC XNS, DEC-MOP-Dump-Load, DEC-MOP,
DEC-LAT, Ethertalk, Appletalk-ARP, Novell-IPX(old), Novell-IPX(new), EAPOL, Telxon-TXP,
Aironet-DDP, Enet-Config-Test, IP, IPv6, NetBEUI, PPPoE_Discovery, PPPoE_PPP_Session)
200
Operation
Filtering Commands
Default
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Use the filter ethernet-type enable command to enable filtering for Ethernet types specified in the
filtering table, or the no filter ethernet-type enable command to disable all filtering based on the
filtering table.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#filter ethernet-type protocol ARP
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
filter ethernet-type enable (page 199)
5.14.6 show filters
This command shows the filter options and protocol entries in the filter table.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show filters
Protocol Filter Information
=======================================================================
Local AP
:Traffic among all client STAs blocked
AP Management
:ENABLED
Ethernet Type Filter :DISABLED
UPlink Access Table
----------------------------------------------------------------------UPlink access control:Enabled
UPlink MAC access control list
00-12-34-56-78-9a
----------------------------------------------------------------------Enabled Protocol Filters
----------------------------------------------------------------------No protocol filters are enabled
=======================================================================
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
201
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.15
WDS Bridge Commands
The WDS Bridge commands are not applicable for the current release.
202
Operation
Spanning Tree Commands
5.16
Spanning Tree Commands
The Spanning Tree commands are not applicable for the current version.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
203
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.17
Ethernet Interface Commands
The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the
Ethernet port and wireless interface.
Table 5-16: Ethernet Interface Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
interface ethernet
Enters Ethernet interface configuration mode
GC
204
dns primary- server
Specifies the primary name server
IC-E
204
dns secondary- server
Specifies the secondary name server
IC-E
204
ip address
Sets the IP address for the Ethernet interface
IC-E
205
ip dhcp
Submits a DHCP request for an IP address
IC-E
206
speed-duplex
Configures speed and duplex operation on the Ethernet
interface
IC-E
206
shutdown
Disables the Ethernet interface
IC-E
207
show interface ethernet
Shows the status for the Ethernet interface
Exec
207
5.17.1 interface ethernet
This command enters Ethernet interface configuration mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
To specify the 10/100Base-TX network interface, enter the following command:
Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.17.2 dns server
This command specifies the address for the primary or secondary domain name
server to be used for name-to-address resolution.
Syntax
dns primary-server 
dns secondary-server 
• primary-server - Primary server used for name resolution.
• secondary-server - Secondary server used for name resolution.
• server-address - IP address of domain-name server.
204
Operation
Ethernet Interface Commands
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The primary and secondary name servers are queried in sequence.
Example
This example specifies two domain-name servers.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns primary-server 192.168.1.55
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#dns secondary-server 10.1.0.55
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands
show interface ethernet (page 207)
5.17.3 ip address
This command sets the IP address for the AP. Use the no form to restore the
default IP address.
Syntax
ip address   
no ip address
• ip-address - IP address
• netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies the host address bits
used for routing to specific subnets.
• gateway - IP address of the default gateway
Default Setting
IP address: 192.168.1.1
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• DHCP is enabled by default. To manually configure a new IP address, you must first disable the
DHCP client with the no ip dhcp command.
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to
connect the AP to existing IP subnets. You can manually configure a specific IP address using
this command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using the ip dhcp
command. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything
outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
205
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet
Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip address 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands
ip dhcp (page 206)
5.17.4 ip dhcp
This command enables the AP to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. Use
the no form to restore the default IP address.
Syntax
ip dhcp
no ip dhcp
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to
connect the AP to existing IP subnets. You can manually configure a specific IP address using
the ip address command, or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using
this command.
• When you use this command, the AP will begin broadcasting DHCP client requests. The current
IP address (i.e., default or manually configured address) will continue to be effective until a DHCP
reply is received. Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP
address. (DHCP values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#interface ethernet
Enter Ethernet configuration commands, one per line.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#ip dhcp
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
Related Commands
ip address (page 205)
5.17.5 speed-duplex
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when
autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
speed-duplex 
• auto - autonegotiate speed and duplex mode
• 10MH - Forces 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation
• 10MF - Forces 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
206
Operation
Ethernet Interface Commands
• 100MH - Forces 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
• 100MF - Forces 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
Default Setting
Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
If autonegotiation is disabled, the speed and duplex mode must be configured to match the setting
of the attached device.
Example
The following example configures the Ethernet port to 100 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#speed-duplex 100mf
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.17.6 shutdown
This command disables the Ethernet interface. To restart a disabled interface, use
the no form.
Syntax
shutdown
no shutdown
Default Setting
Interface enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
This command allows you to disable the Ethernet port due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive
collisions), and reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also want to disable the
Ethernet port for security reasons.
Example
The following example disables the Ethernet port.
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#shutdown
Enterprise AP(if-ethernet)#
5.17.7 show interface ethernet
This command displays the status for the Ethernet interface.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
207
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
show interface [ethernet]
Default Setting
Ethernet interface
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show interface ethernet
Ethernet Interface Information
========================================
IP Address
: 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask
: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
: 192.168.1.253
Primary DNS
: 192.168.1.55
Secondary DNS
: 10.1.0.55
Speed-duplex
: 100Base-TX Half Duplex
Admin status
: Up
Operational status : Up
========================================
Enterprise AP#
208
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
5.18
Wireless Interface Commands
The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the
wireless interfaces.
Table 5-17: Wireless Interface Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
interface wireless
Enters wireless interface configuration mode
GC
210
vap
Provides access to the VAP interface configuration mode
IC-W
210
speed
Configures the maximum data rate at which the AP
transmits unicast packets
IC-W
211
multicast-data-rate
Configures the maximum rate for transmitting multicast
packets on the wireless interface
IC-W
211
channel
Configures the radio channel
IC-W
213
transmit-power
Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from
the AP
IC-W
213
radio-mode
Forces the operating mode of the 802.11g radio
IC-W (b/g)
214
preamble
Sets the length of the 802.11g signal preamble
IC-W (b/g)
214
antenna control
Selects the antenna control method to use for the radio
IC-W
215
antenna id
Selects the antenna ID to use for the radio
IC-W
215
antenna location
Selects the location of the antenna
IC-W
216
beacon-interval
Configures the rate at which beacon signals are
transmitted from the AP
IC-W
216
dtim-period
Configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must
wake up to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions
IC-W
216
fragmentation- length
Configures the minimum packet size that can be
fragmented
IC-W
217
rts-threshold
Sets the packet size threshold at which an RTS must be
sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station
starting communications
IC-W
218
super-g
Enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance
enhancements
IC-W (b/g)
218
description
Adds a description to the wireless interface
IC-W-VAP
219
ssid
Configures the service set identifier
IC-W-VAP
219
closed system
Opens access to clients without a pre-configured SSID
IC-W-VAP
220
max-association
Configures the maximum number of clients that can be
associated with the AP at the same time
IC-W-VAP
220
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
209
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Table 5-17: Wireless Interface Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
assoc- timeout-interval
Configures the idle time interval (when no frames are
sent) after which a client is disassociated from the VAP
interface
IC-W-VAP
221
auth- timeout-value
Configures the time interval after which clients must be
re-authenticated
IC-W-VAP
221
shutdown
Disables the wireless interface
IC-W-VAP
221
show interface wireless
Shows the status for the wireless interface
Exec
222
show station
Shows the wireless clients associated with the AP
Exec
224
5.18.1 interface wireless
This command enters wireless interface configuration mode.
Syntax
interface wireless < g>
• g - 802.11g radio interface.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
To specify the 802.11g interface, enter the following command:
Enterprise AP(config)#interface wireless g
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.2 vap
This command provides access to the VAP (Virtual Access Point) interface
configuration mode.
Syntax
vap 
vap-id - The number that identifies the VAP interface. (Options: 0-3)
210
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#vap 0
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
5.18.3 speed
This command configures the maximum data rate at which the transmits unicast
packets.
Syntax
speed 
speed - Maximum access speed allowed for wireless clients. (Options for 802.11b/g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9,
11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps))
Default Setting
54 Mbps
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate. The lower the data rate, the
longer the transmission distance. Please refer to the table for maximum distances .
• When turbo mode is enabled ( page 219), the effective maximum speed specified by this command
is double the entered value (e.g., setting the speed to 54 Mbps limits the effective maximum speed to
108 Mbps).
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#speed 6
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.4 multicast-data-rate
This command configures the maximum data rate at which the AP transmits
multicast and management packets (excluding beacon packets) on the wireless
interface.
Syntax
multicast-data-rate 
speed - Maximum transmit speed allowed for multicast data.
(Options for 802.11b/g; 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
211
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
1 Mbps for 802.11b/g
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#multicast-data-rate 5.5
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
212
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
5.18.5 channel
This command configures the radio channel through which the AP communicates
with wireless clients.
Syntax
channel 
• channel - Manually sets the radio channel used for communications with wireless clients. (Range for
802.11b/g: 1 to 14)
• auto - Automatically selects an unoccupied channel (if available). Otherwise, the lowest channel
is selected.
Default Setting
Automatic channel selection
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The available channel settings are limited by local regulations, which determine the number of
channels that are available.
• When multiple APs are deployed in the same area, be sure to choose channels separated by at
least four channels from each other . You can deploy up to three APs in the same area for
802.11b/g (e.g., channels 1, 6, 11).
• When using Turbo Mode (Super G enabled), select channel 6.
• For most wireless adapters, the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that
used by the AP to which it is linked.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#channel 1
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.6 transmit-power
This command adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the AP.
Syntax
transmit-power 
signal-strength - Signal strength transmitted from the AP. (Options: full, half, quarter, eighth,
min)
Default Setting
full
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The “min” keyword indicates minimum power.
• The longer the transmission distance, the higher the transmission power required. But to support
the maximum number of users in an area, you must keep the power as low as possible. Power
selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients. You also
have to ensure that high strength signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio devices
in your area.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
213
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#transmit-power half
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.7 radio-mode
This command forces the operating mode for the 802.11g wireless interface.
Syntax
radio-mode 
• b - b-only mode: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the AP, but 802.11g
clients can only transfer data at 802.11b standard rates (up to 11 Mbps).
• g - g-only mode: Only 802.11g clients can communicate with the AP (up to 54 Mbps).
• b+g - b & g mixed mode: Both 802.11b and 802.11g clients can communicate with the AP (up to
54 Mbps).
Default Setting
b+g mode
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11g)
Command Usage
• For Japan, only 13 channels are available when set to g or b+g modes. When set to b mode, 14
channels are available.
• Both the 802.11g and 802.11b standards operate within the 2.4 GHz band. If you are operating
in g mode, any 802.11b devices in the service area will contribute to the radio frequency noise
and affect network performance.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#radio-mode g
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.8 preamble
This command sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a
802.11b/g data transmission.
Syntax
preamble [long | short-or-long]
• long - Sets the preamble to long (192 microseconds).
• short-or-long - Sets the preamble to short if no 802.11b clients are detected (96 microseconds).
Default Setting
Short-or-Long
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11b/g)
Command Usage
• Using a short preamble instead of a long preamble can increase data throughput on the AP, but
requires that all clients can support a short preamble.
• Set the preamble to long to ensure the AP can support all 802.11b and 802.11g clients.
214
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#preamble short
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.9 antenna control
This command selects the use of two diversity antennas or a single antenna for
the radio interface.
Syntax
antenna control 
• diversity - The radio uses two identical antennas in a diversity mode.
• left - The radio uses a single antenna on the left side.
• right - The radio uses a single antenna on the right side.
Default Setting
Diversity
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control method to configure
proper use of any of the antenna options.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna control right
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.10 antenna id
This command specifies the antenna type connected to the AP represented by a
four-digit hexadecimal ID number.
Syntax
antenna id 
• antenna-id - Specifies the ID number of an approved antenna that is connected to the AP
(Range: 0x0000 - 0xFFFF)
Default Setting
0x0000 (None). The unit will not transmit until an antenna is defined
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The optional external antennas (if any) that are certified for use with the AP are listed by typing
antenna control id ?. Selecting the correct antenna ID ensures that the AP's radio transmissions
are within regulatory power limits for the country of operation.
• The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control method to configure
proper use of any of the antenna options.
• In the current release, select id=0x0108 for the 8dBi omni antenna.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
215
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna id 0000
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.11 antenna location
This command selects the antenna mounting location for the radio interface.
Syntax
antenna location 
• outdoor - The antenna is mounted outdoors.
Default Setting
Outdoor
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• Selecting the correct location ensures that the AP only uses radio channels that are permitted in
the country of operation.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#antenna location outdoor
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.12 beacon-interval
This command configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from
the AP.
Syntax
beacon-interval 
interval - The rate for transmitting beacon signals. (Range: 20-1000 milliseconds)
Default Setting
100
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the AP. They may also carry
power-management information.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#beacon-interval 150
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.13 dtim-period
This command configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up
to receive broadcast/multicast transmissions.
216
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Syntax
dtim-period 
interval - Interval between the beacon frames that transmit broadcast or multicast traffic.
(Range: 1-255 beacon frames)
Default Setting
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) packet interval value indicates how often the MAC
layer forwards broadcast/multicast traffic. This parameter is necessary to wake up stations that
are using Power Save mode.
• The DTIM is the interval between two synchronous frames with broadcast/multicast information.
The default value of 2 indicates that the AP will save all broadcast/multicast frames for the Basic
Service Set (BSS) and forward them after every second beacon.
• Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast/multicast frames in a more timely manner,
causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster. Using higher
DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode, but delays the
transmission of broadcast/multicast frames.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#dtim-period 100
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.14 fragmentation-length
This command configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented when
passing through the AP.
Syntax
fragmentation-length 
length - Minimum packet size for which fragmentation is allowed. (Range: 256-2346 bytes)
Default Setting
2346
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• If the packet size is smaller than the preset Fragment size, the packet will not be segmented.
• Fragmentation of the PDUs (Package Data Unit) can increase the reliability of transmissions
because it increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size. If
there is significant interference present, or collisions due to high network utilization, try setting the
fragment size to send smaller fragments. This will speed up the retransmission of smaller frames.
However, it is more efficient to set the fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present
because it requires overhead to send multiple frames.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
217
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#fragmentation-length 512
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.15 rts-threshold
This command sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send (RTS)
signal must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting
communications.
Syntax
rts-threshold 
threshold - Threshold packet size for which to send an RTS. (Range: 0-2347 bytes)
Default Setting
2347
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• If the threshold is set to 0, the AP always sends RTS signals. If set to 2347, the AP never sends
RTS signals. If set to any other value, and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold,
the RTS/CTS (Request to Send / Clear to Send) mechanism will be enabled.
• The AP sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame. After
receiving an RTS frame, the station sends a CTS frame to notify the sending station that it can
start sending data.
• APs contending for the wireless medium may not be aware of each other. The RTS/CTS
mechanism can solve this “Hidden Node” problem.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rts-threshold 256
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.16 super-g
This command enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements.
Use the no form to disable this function.
218
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Syntax
[no] super-g
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless - 802.11g)
Command Usage
These enhancements include bursting, compression, fast frames and dynamic turbo. Maximum
throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros-compatible clients.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#super g
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.17 description
This command adds a description to a the wireless interface. Use the no form to
remove the description.
Syntax
description 
no description
string - Comment or a description for this interface.
(Range: 1-80 characters)
Default Setting
Radio G: Enterprise 802.11g Access Point
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#description RD-AP#3
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
5.18.18 ssid
This command configures the service set identifier (SSID).
Syntax
ssid 
string - The name of a basic service set supported by the AP. (Range: 0 - 7 characters)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
219
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
802.11g Radio: VAP_TEST_11G (0 to 3)
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
Clients that want to connect to the wireless network via an AP must set their SSIDs to the same as
that of the AP.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#ssid RD-AP#3
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.19 closed-system
This command prohibits access to clients without a pre-configured SSID. Use the
no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
closed-system
no closed-system
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
When closed system is enabled, the AP will not include its SSID in beacon messages. Nor will it
respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#closed-system
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.20 max-association
This command configures the maximum number of clients that can be associated
with the AP at the same time.
Syntax
max-association 
count - Maximum number of associated stations. (Range: 0-64)
220
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Default Setting
64
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#max-association 32
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.21 assoc-timeout-interval
This command configures the idle time interval (when no frames are sent) after
which the client is disassociated from the VAP interface.
Syntax
assoc-timeout-interval 
minutes - The number of minutes of inactivity before disassociation. (Range: 5-60)
Default Setting
30
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#association-timeout-interval 20
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
5.18.22 auth-timeout-value
This command configures the time interval within which clients must complete
authentication to the VAP interface.
Syntax
auth-timeout-value 
minutes - The number of minutes before re-authentication. (Range: 5-60)
Default Setting
60
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth-timeout-value 40
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
5.18.23 shutdown
This command disables the wireless interface. Use the no form to restart the
interface.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
221
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
shutdown
no shutdown
Default Setting
Interface enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable VAP interfaces 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#shutdown
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.18.24 show interface wireless
This command displays the status for the wireless interface.
Syntax
show interface wireless < g> vap-id
• g - 802.11g radio interface.
• vap-id - The number that identifies the VAP interface. (Options: 0~3)
222
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show interface wireless g 0
Wireless Interface Information
=========================================================================
----------------Identification------------------------------------------Description
: Enterprise 802.11g Access Point
SSID
: VAP_TEST_11G 0
Channel
: 1 (AUTO)
Status
: ENABLED
MAC Address
: 00:03:7f:fe:03:02
----------------802.11 Parameters---------------------------------------Radio Mode
: b & g mixed mode
Protection Method
: CTS only
Transmit Power
: FULL (16 dBm)
Max Station Data Rate
: 54Mbps
Multicast Data Rate
: 5.5Mbps
Fragmentation Threshold
: 2346 bytes
RTS Threshold
: 2347 bytes
Beacon Interval
: 100 TUs
Authentication Timeout Interval : 60 Mins
Association Timeout Interval
: 30 Mins
DTIM Interval
: 1 beacon
Preamble Length
: LONG
Maximum Association
: 64 stations
MIC Mode
: Software
Super G
: Disabled
VLAN ID
: 1
----------------Security------------------------------------------------Closed System
: Disabled
Multicast cipher
: WEP
Unicast cipher
: TKIP and AES
WPA clients
: DISABLED
WPA Key Mgmt Mode
: PRE SHARED KEY
WPA PSK Key Type
: PASSPHRASE
WPA PSK Key
: EMPTY
PMKSA Lifetime
: 720 minutes
Encryption
: ENABLED
Default Transmit Key
: 1
Common Static Keys
: Key 1: EMPTY
Key 2: EMPTY
Key 3: EMPTY
Key 4: EMPTY
Pre-Authentication
: DISABLED
Authentication Type
: SHARED
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
223
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
----------------802.1x--------------------------------------------------802.1x
: DISABLED
Broadcast Key Refresh Rate
: 30 min
Session Key Refresh Rate
: 30 min
802.1x Session Timeout Value
: 0 min
----------------Antenna-------------------------------------------------Antenna Control method
: Diversity
Antenna ID
: 0x0000(Default Antenna)
Antenna Location
: Outdoor
----------------Quality of Service--------------------------------------WMM Mode
: SUPPORTED
WMM Acknowledge Policy
AC0(Best Effort)
: Acknowledge
AC1(Background)
: Acknowledge
AC2(Video)
: Acknowledge
AC3(Voice)
: Acknowledge
WMM BSS Parameters
AC0(Best Effort)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN: 3
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC1(Background)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC2(Video)
: logCwMin: 3 logCwMax: 4 AIFSN: 2
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 3.008 ms
AC3(Voice)
: logCwMin: 2 logCwMax: 3 AIFSN: 2
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms
WMM AP Parameters
AC0(Best Effort)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 6 AIFSN: 3
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC1(Background)
: logCwMin: 4 logCwMax: 10 AIFSN: 7
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 0.000 ms
AC2(Video)
: logCwMin: 3 logCwMax: 4 AIFSN: 1
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 3.008 ms
AC3(Voice)
: logCwMin: 2 logCwMax: 3 AIFSN: 1
Admission Control: No
TXOP Limit: 1.504 ms
=========================================================================
Enterprise AP#
5.18.25 show station
This command shows the wireless clients associated with the AP.
224
Operation
Wireless Interface Commands
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show station
Station Table Information
========================================================
if-wireless g VAP [0]
802.11g Channel : 60
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
if-wireless G VAP [0]
802.11g Channel : 1
802.11g Channel Station Table
Station Address
: 00-04-23-94-9A-9C VLAN ID: 0
Authenticated Associated
Forwarding
KeyType
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
NONE
Counters:pkts
Tx
Rx
bytes
Tx
Rx
20/
721/
Time:Associated LastAssoc
LastDisAssoc LastAuth
if-wireless G VAP [1]
802.11g Channel : 1
No 802.11g Channel Stations.
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
225
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.19
Rogue AP Detection Commands
A “rogue AP” is either an AP that is not authorized to participate in the wireless
network, or an AP that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue
APs can potentially allow unauthorized users access to the network. Alternatively,
client stations may mistakenly associate to a rogue AP and be prevented from
accessing network resources. Rogue APs may also cause radio interference and
degrade the wireless LAN performance.
The AP can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other
APs within range. A database of nearby APs is maintained where any rogue APs
can be identified.
Table 5-18: Rogue AP Detection Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
rogue-ap enable
Enables the periodic detection of other nearby APs
GC
226
rogue-ap authenticate
Enables identification of all APs
GC
227
rogue-ap duration
Sets the duration that all channels are scanned
GC
227
rogue-ap interval
Sets the time between each scan
GC
228
rogue-ap scan
Forces an immediate scan of all radio channels
GC
228
show rogue-ap
Shows the current database of detected APs
Exec
229
5.19.1 rogue-ap enable
This command enables the periodic detection of nearby APs. Use the no form to
disable periodic detection.
Syntax
[no] rogue-ap enable
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• While the AP scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the
AP. Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to
believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.
• A “rogue AP” is either an AP that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network, or an AP
that does not have the correct security configuration. Rogue APs can be identified by unknown
BSSID (MAC address) or SSID configuration. A database of nearby sh
• s should therefore be maintained on a RADIUS server, allowing any rogue APs to be identified
(see “rogue-ap authenticate” on page 227). The rogue AP database can be viewed using
226
Operation
Rogue AP Detection Commands
the show rogue-ap command.
• The AP sends Syslog messages for each detected AP during a rogue AP scan.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap enable
configure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected.
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.19.2 rogue-ap authenticate
This command forces the unit to authenticate all APs on the network. Use the no
form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] rogue-ap authenticate
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
Enabling authentication in conjunction with a database of approved APs stored on a RADIUS
server allows the AP to discover rogue APs. With authentication enabled and a configure RADIUS
server, the AP checks the MAC address/Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of each AP that it
finds against a RADIUS server to determine whether the AP is allowed. With authentication
disabled, the AP can identify its neighboring APs only; it cannot identify whether the APs are
allowed or are rogues. If you enable authentication, you should also configure a RADIUS server
for this AP (see “RADIUS” on page 48).
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap authenticate
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.19.3 rogue-ap duration
This command sets the scan duration for detecting APs.
Syntax
rogue-ap duration 
milliseconds - The duration of the scan. (Range: 100-1000 milliseconds)
Default Setting
350 milliseconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• During a scan, client access may be disrupted and new clients may not be able to associate to
the AP. If clients experience severe disruption, reduce the scan duration time.
• A long scan duration time will detect more APs in the area, but causes more disruption to client
access.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
227
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap duration 200
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
rogue-ap interval (page 228)
5.19.4 rogue-ap interval
This command sets the interval at which to scan for APs.
Syntax
rogue-ap interval 
minutes - The interval between consecutive scans. (Range: 30-10080 minutes)
Default Setting
720 minutes
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
This command sets the interval at which scans occur. Frequent scanning will more readily detect
other APs, but will cause more disruption to client access.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap interval 120
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
rogue-ap duration (page 227)
5.19.5 rogue-ap scan
This command starts an immediate scan for APs on the radio interface.
228
Operation
Rogue AP Detection Commands
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
While the AP scans a channel for rogue APs, wireless clients will not be able to connect to the AP.
Therefore, avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe
that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogue-ap scan
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#rogueApDetect Completed (Radio G) : 9 APs detected
rogueAPDetect (Radio G): refreshing ap database now
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.19.6 show rogue-ap
This command displays the current rogue AP database.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show rogue-ap
802.11g Channel : Rogue AP Status
AP Address(BSSID)
SSID
Channel(MHz) RSSI Type Privacy RSN
======================================================================
00-04-e2-2a-37-23
WLAN1AP
11(2462 MHz)
17 ESS
00-04-e2-2a-37-3d
ANY
7(2442 MHz)
42 ESS
00-04-e2-2a-37-49
WLAN1AP
9(2452 MHz)
42 ESS
00-90-d1-08-9d-a7
WLAN1AP
1(2412 MHz)
12 ESS
00-30-f1-fb-31-f4
WLAN
6(2437 MHz)
16 ESS
Enterprise AP#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
229
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.20
Wireless Security Commands
The commands described in this section configure parameters for wireless
security on the 802.11g interface.
Table 5-19: Wireless Security Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
auth
Defines the 802.11 authentication type allowed by the AP
IC-W-VAP
232
encryption
Defines whether or not WEP encryption is used to
provide privacy for wireless communications
IC-W-VAP
232
key
Sets the keys used for WEP encryption
IC-W
232
transmit-key
Sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data
frames sent between the AP and wireless clients
IC-W-VAP
233
cipher-suite
Selects an encryption method for the global key used for
multicast and broadcast traffic
IC-W-VAP
234
mic_mode
Specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity Check
(MIC)
IC-W
235
wpa-pre-shared- key
Defines a WPA preshared-key value
IC-W-VAP
235
pmksa-lifetime
Sets the lifetime PMK security associations
IC-W-VAP
236
pre-authentication
Enables WPA2 pre-authentication for fast roaming
IC-W-VAP
236
5.20.1 auth
This command configures authentication for the VAP interface.
Syntax
auth  
• open-system - Accepts the client without verifying its identity using a shared key. “Open”
authentication means either there is no encryption (if encryption is disabled) or WEP-only
encryption is used (if encryption is enabled).
• shared-key - Authentication is based on a shared key that has been distributed to all stations.
• wpa - Clients using WPA are accepted for authentication.
• wpa-psk - Clients using WPA with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.
• wpa2 - Clients using WPA2 are accepted for authentication.
• wpa2-psk - Clients using WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for authentication.
• wpa-wpa2-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for authentication.
• wpa-wpa2-psk-mixed - Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre-shared Key are accepted for
authentication
• required - Clients are required to use WPA or WPA2.
• supported - Clients may use WPA or WPA2, if supported.
230
Operation
Wireless Security Commands
Default Setting
open-system
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• The auth command automatically configures settings for each authentication type, including
encryption, 802.1X, and cipher suite. The command auth open-system disables encryption and
802.1X.
• To use WEP shared-key authentication, set the authentication type to “shared-key” and define at
least one static WEP key with the key command. Encryption is automatically enabled by the
command.
• To use WEP encryption only (no authentication), set the authentication type to “open-system.”
Then enable WEP with the encryption command, and define at least one static WEP key with
the key command.
• When any WPA or WPA2 option is selected, clients are authenticated using 802.1X via a RADIUS
server. Each client must be WPA-enabled or support 802.1X client software. The 802.1X settings
(see “802.1X Authentication” on page 191) and RADIUS server details (see “RADIUS
Client” on page 185) must be configured on the AP. A RADIUS server must also be
configured and be available in the wired network.
• If a WPA/WPA2 mode that operates over 802.1X is selected (WPA, WPA2, WPA-WPA2-mixed,
or WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the 802.1X settings (see “802.1X Authentication” on
page 191) and RADIUS server details (see “RADIUS Client” on page 185) must be
configured. Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling
authentication. Also, note that each client has to be WPA-enabled or support 802.1X client
software. A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network.
• If a WPA/WPA2 Pre-shared Key mode is selected (WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or
WPA-WPA2-PSK-mixed), the key must first be generated and distributed to all wireless clients
before they can successfully associate with the AP. Use the wpa-preshared-key command to
configure the key (see “key” on page 232 and “transmit-key” on page 233).
• WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from WPA security to WPA2.
WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common VAP interface.
When the encryption cipher suite is set to TKIP, the unicast encryption cipher (TKIP or
AES-CCMP) is negotiated for each client. The AP advertises it’s supported encryption ciphers in
beacon frames and probe responses. WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and
return the choice in the association request to the . For mixed-mode operation, the cipher used
for broadcast frames is always TKIP. WEP encryption is not allowed.
• The “required” option places the VAP into TKIP only mode. The “supported” option places the
VAP into TKIP+AES+WEP mode. The “required” mode is used in WPA-only environments.
• The “supported” mode can be used for mixed environments with legacy WPA products,
specifically WEP. (For example, WPA+WEP. The WPA2+WEP environment is not available
because WPA2 does not support WEP). To place the VAP into AES only mode, use “required”
and then select the “cipher-ccmp” option for the cipher-suite command.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
231
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#auth shared-key
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
encryption (page 232)
key (page 232)
5.20.2 encryption
This command enables data encryption for wireless communications. Use the no
form to disable data encryption.
Syntax
encryption
no encryption
Default Setting
disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is implemented in this device to prevent unauthorized access to
your wireless network. For more secure data transmissions, enable encryption with this
command, and set at least one static WEP key with the key command.
• The WEP settings must be the same on each client in your wireless network.
• Note that WEP protects data transmitted between wireless nodes, but does not protect any
transmissions over your wired network or over the Internet.
• You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption (WEP, TKIP, and
AES-CCMP) in the AP.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#encryption
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
key (page 232)
5.20.3 key
This command sets the keys used for WEP encryption. Use the no form to delete a
configured key.
Syntax
key    
no key index
•
•
•
•
232
index - Key index. (Range: 1-4)
size - Key size. (Options: 64, 128, or 152 bits)
type - Input format. (Options: ASCII, HEX)
value - The key string.
- For 64-bit keys, use 5 alphanumeric characters or 10 hexadecimal digits.
Operation
Wireless Security Commands
- For 128-bit keys, use 13 alphanumeric characters or 26 hexadecimal digits.
- For 152-bit keys, use 16 alphanumeric characters or 32 hexadecimal digits.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• To enable Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), use the auth shared-key command to select the
“shared key” authentication type, use the key command to configure at least one key, and use
the transmit-key command to assign a key to one of the VAP interfaces.
• If WEP option is enabled, all wireless clients must be configured with the same shared keys to
communicate with the AP.
• The encryption index, length and type configured in the AP must match those configured in the
clients.
Example
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
Enterprise
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
AP(if-wireless
g)#key 1 64 hex 1234512345
g)#key 2 128 ascii asdeipadjsipd
g)#key 3 64 hex 12345123451234512345123456
g)#
Related Commands
key (page 232)
encryption (page 232)
transmit-key (page 233)
5.20.4 transmit-key
This command sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data frames for
broadcast or multicast traffic transmitted from the VAP to wireless clients.
Syntax
transmit-key 
index - Key index. (Range: 1-4)
Default Setting
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• If you use WEP key encryption option, the AP uses the transmit key to encrypt multicast and
broadcast data signals that it sends to client devices. Other keys can be used for decryption of
data from clients.
• When using IEEE 802.1X, the AP uses a dynamic key to encrypt unicast and broadcast
messages to 802.1X-enabled clients. However, because the AP sends the keys during the
802.1X authentication process, these keys do not have to appear in the client’s key list.
• In a mixed-mode environment with clients using static and dynamic keys, select transmit key
index 2, 3, or 4. The AP uses transmit key index 1 for the generation of dynamic keys.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
233
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#transmit-key 2
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.20.5 cipher-suite
This command defines the cipher algorithm used to encrypt the global key for
broadcast and multicast traffic when using WiFi Protected Access (WPA) security.
Syntax
multicast-cipher 
• aes-ccmp - Use AES-CCMP encryption for the unicast and multicast cipher.
• tkip - Use TKIP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can be used for the
unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client.
• wep - Use WEP encryption for the multicast cipher. TKIP or AES-CCMP can be used for the
unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client.
Default Setting
wep
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• WPA enables the AP to support different unicast encryption keys for each client. However, the
global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients.
• If any clients supported by the AP are not WPA enabled, the multicast-cipher algorithm must be
set to WEP.
• WEP is the first generation security protocol used to encrypt data crossing the wireless medium
using a fairly short key. Communicating devices must use the same WEP key to encrypt and
decrypt radio signals. WEP has many security flaws, and is not recommended for transmitting
highly sensitive data.
• TKIP provides data encryption enhancements including per-packet key hashing (i.e., changing
the encryption key on each packet), a message integrity check, an extended initialization vector
with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. Select TKIP if there are clients in the network
that are not WPA2 compliant.
• TKIP defends against attacks on WEP in which the unencrypted initialization vector in encrypted
packets is used to calculate the WEP key. TKIP changes the encryption key on each packet, and
rotates not just the unicast keys, but the broadcast keys as well. TKIP is a replacement for WEP
that removes the predictability that intruders relied on to determine the WEP key.
• AES-CCMP (Advanced Encryption Standard Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol): WPA2 is
backward compatible with WPA, including the same 802.1X and PSK modes of operation and
support for TKIP encryption. The main enhancement is its use of AES Counter-Mode encryption
with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CBC-MAC) for message integrity. The
AES Counter-Mode/CBCMAC Protocol (AES-CCMP) provides extremely robust data
confidentiality using a 128-bit key. The AES-CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard
requirement for WPA2. However, the computational intensive operations of AES-CCMP requires
hardware support on client devices. Therefore to implement WPA2 in the network, wireless
clients must be upgraded to WPA2-compliant hardware.
234
Operation
Wireless Security Commands
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#multicast-cipher TKIP
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.20.6 mic_mode
This command specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity Check (MIC).
Syntax
mic_mode 
• hardware - Uses hardware to calculate the MIC.
• software - Uses software to calculate the MIC.
Default Setting
software
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• The Michael Integrity Check (MIC) is part of the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)
encryption used in WiFi Protected Access (WPA) security. The MIC calculation is performed in
the AP for each transmitted packet and this can impact throughput and performance. The AP
supports a choice of hardware or software for MIC calculation. The performance of the AP can
be improved by selecting the best method for the specific deployment.
• Using the “hardware” option provides best performance when the number of supported clients is
less than 27.
• Using the “software” option provides the best performance for a large number of clients on one
radio interface. Throughput may be reduced when the 802.11g interface supports a high number of
clients simultaneously.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#mic_mode hardware
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.20.7 wpa-pre-shared-key
This command defines a WiFi Protected Access (WPA/WPA2) Pre-shared-key.
Syntax
wpa-pre-shared-key  
• hex - Specifies hexadecimal digits as the key input format.
• passphrase-key - Specifies an ASCII pass-phrase string as the key input format.
• value - The key string. For ASCII input, specify a string between 8 and 63 characters. For HEX
input, specify exactly 64 digits.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• To support WPA or WPA2 for client authentication, use the auth command to specify the
authentication type, and use the wpa-preshared-key command to specify one static key.
• If WPA or WPA2 is used with pre-shared-key mode, all wireless clients must be configured with
the same pre-shared key to communicate with the AP’s VAP interface.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
235
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key ASCII agoodsecret
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
Related Commands
auth (page 230)
5.20.8 pmksa-lifetime
This command sets the time for aging out cached WPA2 Pairwise Master Key
Security Association (PMKSA) information for fast roaming.
Syntax
pmksa-lifetime 
minutes - The time for aging out PMKSA information. (Range: 0 - 14400 minutes)
Default Setting
720 minutes
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security
information in a cache, so that if a client roams away from an AP and then returns
reauthentication is not required.
• When a WPA2 client is first authenticated, it receives a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) that is used
to generate other keys for unicast data encryption. This key and other client information form a
Security Association that the AP names and holds in a cache. The lifetime of this security
association can be configured with this command. When the lifetime expires, the client security
association and keys are deleted from the cache. If the client returns to the AP, it requires full
reauthentication.
• The AP can store up to 256 entries in the PMKSA cache.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key ASCII agoodsecret
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
5.20.9 pre-authentication
This command enables WPA2 pre-authentication for fast secure roaming.
Syntax
pre-authentication 
• enable - Enables pre-authentication for the VAP interface.
• disable - Disables pre-authentication for the VAP interface.
236
Operation
Wireless Security Commands
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• Each time a client roams to another AP it has to be fully re-authenticated. This authentication
process is time consuming and can disrupt applications running over the network. WPA2 includes
a mechanism, known as pre-authentication, that allows clients to roam to a new AP and be
quickly associated. The first time a client is authenticated to a wireless network it has to be fully
authenticated. When the client is about to roam to another AP in the network, the AP sends
pre-authentication messages to the new AP that include the client’s security association
information. Then when the client sends an association request to the new AP, the client is known
to be already authenticated, so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association.
• To support pre-authentication, both clients and APs in the network must be WPA2 enabled.
• Pre-authentication requires all APs in the network to be on the same IP subnet.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#wpa-pre-shared-key ASCII agoodsecret
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
237
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.21
Link Integrity Commands
The AP provides a link integrity feature that can be used to ensure that wireless
clients are connected to resources on the wired network. The AP does this by
periodically sending Ping messages to a host device in the wired Ethernet
network. If the AP detects that the connection to the host has failed, it disables
the radio interfaces, forcing clients to find and associate with another AP. When
the connection to the host is restored, the AP re-enables the radio interfaces.
Table 5-20: Link Integrity Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
link-integrity ping-detect
Enables link integrity detection
GC
238
link-integrity ping-host
Specifies the IP address of a host device in the wired
network
GC
239
link-integrity ping-interval
Specifies the time between each Ping sent to the link
host
GC
239
link-integrity ping-fail-retry
Specifies the number of consecutive failed Ping
counts before the link is determined as lost
GC
239
link-integrity ethernet-detect
Enables integrity check for Ethernet link
GC
240
show link-integrity
Displays the current link integrity configuration
Exec
240
5.21.1 link-integrity ping-detect
This command enables link integrity detection. Use the no form to disable link
integrity detection.
Syntax
[no] link-integrity ping-detect
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When link integrity is enabled, the IP address of a host device in the wired network must be
specified.
• The AP periodically sends an ICMP echo request (Ping) packet to the link host IP address. When
the number of failed responses (either the host does not respond or is unreachable) exceeds the
limit set by the link-integrity ping-fail-retry command, the link is determined as lost.
238
Operation
Link Integrity Commands
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-detect
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.21.2 link-integrity ping-host
This command configures the link host name or IP address. Use the no form to
remove the host setting.
Syntax
link-integrity ping-host 
no link-integrity ping-host
• host_name - Alias of the host.
• ip_address - IP address of the host.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-host 192.168.1.10
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.21.3 link-integrity ping-interval
This command configures the time between each Ping sent to the link host.
Syntax
link-integrity ping-interval 
interval - The time between Pings. (Range: 5 - 60 seconds)
Default Setting
30 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-interval 20
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.21.4 link-integrity ping-fail-retry
This command configures the number of consecutive failed Ping counts before the
link is determined as lost.
Syntax
link-integrity ping-fail-retry 
counts - The number of failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost. (Range: 1 - 10)
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
239
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Default Setting
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ping-fail-retry 10
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.21.5 link-integrity ethernet-detect
This command enables an integrity check to determine whether or not the AP is
connected to the wired Ethernet.
Syntax
[no] link-integrity ethernet-detect
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#link-integrity ethernet-detect
Notification : Ethernet Link Detect SUCCESS - RADIO(S) ENABLED
Enterprise AP(config)#
5.21.6 show link-integrity
This command displays the current link integrity configuration.
Command Mode
Exec
Example
Enterprise AP#show link-integrity
Link Integrity Information
===========================================================
Ethernet Detect : Enabled
Ping Detect
: Enabled
Target IP/Name : 192.168.0.140
Ping Fail Retry : 6
Ping Interval
: 30
===========================================================
Enterprise AP#
240
Operation
IAPP Commands
5.22
IAPP Commands
The command described in this section enables the protocol signaling required to
ensure the successful handover of wireless clients roaming between different
802.11f-compliant APs. In other words, the 802.11f protocol can ensure
successful roaming between APs in a multi-vendor environment.
5.22.1 iapp
This command enables the protocol signaling required to hand over wireless
clients roaming between different 802.11f-compliant APs. Use the no form to
disable 802.11f signaling.
Syntax
[no] iapp
Default
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The current 802.11 standard does not specify the signaling required between APs in order to
support clients roaming from one AP to another. In particular, this can create a problem for clients
roaming between APs from different vendors. This command is used to enable or disable 802.11f
handover signaling between different APs, especially in a multi-vendor environment.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#iapp
Enterprise AP(config)#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
241
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
5.23
VLAN Commands
The AP can enable the support of VLAN-tagged traffic passing between wireless
clients and the wired network. Up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific
wireless clients, allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they move
around a campus site.
When VLAN is enabled on the AP, a VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can
be assigned to each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802.1X and
a central RADIUS server. The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS
server for each user authorized to access the network. If a user does not have a
configured VLAN ID, the AP assigns the user to its own configured native VLAN
ID.
CAUTION
When VLANs are enabled, the AP’s Ethernet port drops all received traffic that does not include a
VLAN tag. To maintain network connectivity to the AP and wireless clients, be sure that the AP is
connected to a device port on a wired network that supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tags.
The VLAN commands supported by the AP are listed below.
Table 5-21: VLAN Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
vlan
Enables a single VLAN for all traffic
GC
242
managementvlanid
Configures the management VLAN for the AP
GC
243
vlan-id
Configures the default VLAN for the VAP interface
IC-W-VAP
243
5.23.1 vlan
This command enables VLANs for all traffic. Use the no form to disable VLANs.
Syntax
[no] vlan enable
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Description
• When VLANs are enabled, the AP tags frames received from wireless clients with the VLAN ID
configured for each client on the RADIUS server. If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a
client on the RADIUS server, then the frames are tagged with the AP’s native VLAN ID.
242
Operation
VLAN Commands
• Traffic entering the Ethernet port must be tagged with a VLAN ID that matches the AP’s native
VLAN ID, or with a VLAN tag that matches one of the wireless clients currently associated with
the AP.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#vlan enable
Reboot system now? : y
Related Commands
management-vlanid (page 243)
5.23.2 management-vlanid
This command configures the management VLAN ID for the AP.
Syntax
management-vlanid 
vlan-id - Management VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The management VLAN is for managing the AP. For example, the AP allows traffic that is tagged
with the specified VLAN to manage the AP via remote management, SSH, SNMP, Telnet, etc.
Example
Enterprise AP(config)#management-vlanid 3
Enterprise AP(config)#
Related Commands
vlan (page 242)
5.23.3 vlan-id
This command configures the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface.
Syntax
vlan-id 
vlan-id - Native VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless-VAP)
Command Usage
• To implement the default VLAN ID setting for VAP interface, the AP must enable VLAN support
using the vlan command.
• When VLANs are enabled, the AP tags frames received from wireless clients with the default
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
243
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
VLAN ID for the VAP interface. If IEEE 802.1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients,
specific VLAN IDs can be configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client. Using
IEEE 802.1X and a central RADIUS server, up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific
wireless clients.
• If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS server, then the frames are
tagged with the default VLAN ID of the VAP interface.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#vlan-id 3
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g: VAP[0])#
244
Operation
WMM Commands
5.24
WMM Commands
The AP implements QoS using the WiFi Multimedia (WMM) standard. Using
WMM, the AP is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple
applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time. WMM
employs techniques that are a subset of the developing IEEE 802.11e QoS
standard and it enables the AP to inter-operate with both WMM- enabled clients
and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality.
The WMM commands supported by the AP are listed below.
Table 5-22: WMM Commands
Command
Function
Mode
Page
wmm
Sets the WMM operational mode on the AP
IC-W
245
wmm-acknowledgepolicy
Allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or
disabled for each Access Category (AC)
IC-W
245
wmmparam
Configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the AP
(AP) or the wireless clients (BSS)
IC-W
246
5.24.1 wmm
This command sets the WMM operational mode on the AP. Use the no form to
disable WMM.
Syntax
[no] wmm 
• supported - WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this feature. Devices that
do not support this feature may still associate with the AP.
• required - WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the AP. Devices that
do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the AP.
Default
supported
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm required
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.24.2 wmm-acknowledge-policy
This command allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled
for each Access Category (AC).
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
245
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
Syntax
wmm-acknowledge-policy  
• ac_number - Access categories. (Range: 0-3)
• ack - Require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver.
• noack - Does not require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver.
Default
ack
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Command Usage
• WMM defines four access categories (ACs) – voice, video, best effort, and background. These
categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags (see
Table 4-5). The direct mapping of the four ACs to 802.1D priorities is specifically intended to
facilitate interpretability with other wired network QoS policies. While the four ACs are specified
for specific types of traffic, WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any
network-wide QoS policy. WMM also specifies a protocol that APs can use to communicate the
configured traffic priority levels to QoS-enabled wireless clients.
• Although turning off the requirement for the sender to wait for an acknowledgement can increases
data throughput, it can also result in a high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy.
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmm-acknowledge-policy 0 noack
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
5.24.3 wmmparam
This command configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the AP (AP) or
the wireless clients (BSS).
Syntax
wmmparam      

• AP - Access Point
• BSS - Wireless client
• ac_number - Access categories (ACs) – voice, video, best effort, and background. These
categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802.1D priority tags as
shown in Table 4-5. (Range: 0-3)
• LogCwMin - Minimum log value of the contention window. This is the initial upper limit of the
random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The initial wait time
is a random value between zero and the LogCwMin value. Specify the LogCwMin value. Note that
the LogCwMin value must be equal or less than the LogCwMax value.
(Range: 1-15 microseconds)
• LogCwMax - Maximum log value of the contention window. This is the maximum upper limit of
the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted. The contention
window is doubled after each detected collision up to the LogCwMax value. Note that the CWMax
value must be greater or equal to the LogCwMin value. (Range: 1-15 microseconds)
• AIFS - Arbitrary InterFrame Space specifies the minimum amount of wait time before the next
data transmission attempt. (Range: 1-15 microseconds)
• TXOPLimit - Transmission Opportunity Limit specifies the maximum time an AC transmit queue
has access to the wireless medium. When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity, it can
transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit. This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for
246
Operation
WMM Commands
high data-rate traffic. (Range: 0-65535 microseconds)
• admission_control - The admission control mode for the access category. When enabled, clients
are blocked from using the access category. (Options: 0 to disable, 1 to enable)
Default
Table 5-23: AP Parameters
WMM
Parameters
AC0 (Best Effort)
AC1
(Background)
AC2 (Video)
AC3 (Voice)
LogCwMin
LogCwMax
10
10
AIFS
TXOP Limit
94
47
Admission Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Table 5-24: BSS Parameters
WMM
Parameters
AC0 (Best Effort)
AC1
(Background)
AC2 (Video)
AC3 (Voice)
LogCwMin
LogCwMax
10
AIFS
TXOP Limit
94
47
Admission Control
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Wireless)
Example
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#wmmparams ap 0 4 6 3 1 1
Enterprise AP(if-wireless g)#
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
247
Chapter 5 - Command Line Interface
248
Operation
A
Appendix A - Troubleshooting
In This Chapter:
This appendix provides a lists of things to check in case of problems before
contacting local Technical Support.
Appendix -
Check the following before you contact local Technical Support.
If wireless clients cannot access the network, check the following:
‘ Be sure the AP and the wireless clients are configured with the same
Service Set ID (SSID).
‘ If authentication or encryption are enabled, ensure that the wireless clients
are properly configured with the appropriate authentication or encryption
keys.
‘ If authentication is being performed through a RADIUS server, ensure that
the clients are properly configured on the RADIUS server.
‘ If authentication is being performed through IEEE 802.1X, be sure the
wireless users have installed and properly configured 802.1X client
software.
‘ If MAC address filtering is enabled, be sure the client’s address is included
in the local filtering database or on the RADIUS server database.
‘ If the wireless clients are roaming between access points, make sure that
all the access points and wireless devices in the Extended Service Set (ESS)
are configured to the same SSID, and authentication method.
If the AP cannot be configured using the Telnet, a web browser, or SNMP
software:
‘ Be sure that the AP has been configured with a valid IP address, subnet
mask and default gateway.
‘ If VLANs are enabled on the AP, the management station should be
configured to send tagged frames with a VLAN ID that matches the AP’s
management VLAN (default VLAN 1, page 60). However, to manage the AP
from a wireless client, the AP Management Filter should be disabled (page
57).
‘ Check that you have a valid network connection to the AP and that the
Ethernet port or the wireless interface that you are using has not been
disabled.
‘ If you are connecting to the AP through the wired Ethernet interface, check
the network cabling between the management station and the access
point. If you are connecting to AP from a wireless client, ensure that you
have a valid connection to the AP.
250
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
‘ If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum
number of concurrent Telnet sessions permitted (i.e, four sessions). Try
connecting again at a later time.
If you cannot access the on-board configuration program via a serial port
connection:
‘ Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity and 9600 bps.
If you forgot or lost the password:
‘ Set the AP to its default configuration by pressing the reset button on the
back panel for 5 seconds or more. Then use the default user name admin
and a null password to access the management interface.
If all other recovery measure fail, and the AP is still not functioning properly,
take one of the following steps:
‘ Reset the AP’s hardware using the console interface, web interface, or
through a power reset.
‘ Reset the AP to its default configuration by pressing the reset button on the
back panel for 5 seconds or more. Then use the default user name admin
and a null password to access the management interface.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
251
Glossary
100BASE-TX
IEEE 802.3u specification for 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet over two
pairs of Category 5 or better UTP cable.
10BASE-T
IEEE 802.3 specification for 10 Mbps Ethernet over two pairs
of Category 3 or better UTP cable
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard: An encryption algorithm that
implements symmetric key cryptography. AES provides very
strong encryption using a completely different ciphering
algorithm to TKIP and WEP.
AP
Access Point: The device that acts as a communication hub,
connecting wireless clients to the network.
Authentication
The process to verify the identity of a client requesting network
access. IEEE 802.11 specifies two forms of authentication:
open system and shared key.
Beacon
A signal periodically transmitted from the access point that is
used to identify the service set, and to maintain contact with
wireless clients.
Broadcast Key
Broadcast keys are sent to stations using 802.1X dynamic
keying. Dynamic broadcast key rotation is often used to allow
the access point to generate a random group key and
periodically update all key-management capable wireless
clients.
BSS
Basic Service Set: A set of 802.11-compliant stations and an
access point that operate as a fully-connected wireless
network.
CPE
Customer Premise Equipment: Communications equipment
that resides on the customer's premises.
CSMA/CA
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance
Glossary
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol: Provides a framework for
passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP
network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP),
adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable
network addresses and additional configuration options.
EAP
Extensible Authentication Protocol: An authentication protocol
used to authenticate network clients. EAP is combined with
IEEE 802.1X port authentication and a RADIUS
authentication server to provide “mutual authentication”
between a client, the Wi², and a RADIUS server.
ESS
Extended Service Set: More than one wireless cell can be
configured with the same Service Set Identifier to allow mobile
users can roam between different cells with the Extended
Service Set.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol: A TCP/IP protocol used for file transfer.
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol: HTTP is a standard used to
transmit and receive all data over the World Wide Web.
IAPP
Inter Access Point Protocol: A protocol that specifies the
wireless signaling required to ensure the successful handover
of wireless clients roaming between different
802.11f-compliant Wi²s.
IEEE 802.11b
A wireless standard that supports wireless communications in
the 2.4 GHz band using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
(DSSS). The standard provides for data rates of 1, 2, 5.5, and
11 Mbps.
IEEE 802.11g
A wireless standard that supports wireless communications in
the 2.4 GHz band using using Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (OFDM). The standard provides for data rates of
6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps. IEEE 802.11g is also
backward compatible with IEEE 802.11b.
IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by
requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for
authentication.
LAN
Local Area Network: A group of interconnected computer and
support devices.
254
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Glossary
MAC
Media Access Control: The lower of the two sub-layers of the
data link layer defined by the IEEE. The MAC sub-layer
handles access to shared media, such as whether token
passing or contention will be used.
MAC Address
Standardized data link layer address that is required for every
port or device that connects to a LAN. Other devices in the
network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the
network and to create and update routing tables and data
structures. MAC addresses are 6bytes long and are controlled
by the IEEE.
NTP
Network Time Protocol: NTP provides the mechanisms to
synchronize time across the network. The time servers operate
in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to
synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time
standards via wire or radio.
ODFM
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing: OFDM/ allows
multiple users to transmit in an allocated band by dividing the
bandwidth into many narrow bandwidth carriers.
Open System
A security option for the AP which broadcasts a beacon signal
including the configured SSID. Wireless clients can read the
SSID from the beacon, and automatically reset their SSID to
allow immediate connection to the nearest AP.
PoE
Power over Ethernet: A specification for providing both power
and data to low-power network devices using a single Category
5 Ethernet cable. PoE provides greater flexibility in the locating
of Wi²s and network devices, and significantly decreased
installation costs.
PSK
WPA Pre-shared Key: PSK can be used for small office
networks that may not have the resources to configure and
maintain a RADIUS server, WPA provides a simple operating
mode that uses just a pre-shared password for network access.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service: A logon
authentication protocol that uses software running on a
central server to control access to the network.
Session Key
Session keys are unique to each client, and are used to
authenticate a client connection, and correlate traffic passing
between a specific client and the Wi².
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
255
Glossary
Shared Key
A shared key can be used to authenticate each client attached
to a wireless network. Shared Key authentication must be used
along with the 802.11 Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol: The application
protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network
management services.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol: SNTP allows a device to set its
internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific
NTP server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP
servers.
SSID
Service Set Identifier: An identifier that is attached to packets
sent over the wireless LAN and functions as a password for
joining a particular radio cell; i.e., Basic Service Set (BSS).
SU-ODU
Subscriber Outdoor Unit
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol: A TCP/IP protocol commonly
used for software downloads.
TKIP
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol: A data encryption method
designed as a replacement for WEP. TKIP avoids the problems
of WEP static keys by dynamically changing data encryption
keys.
VAP
Virtual Access Point: Virtual AP technology multiplies the
number of Access Points present within the RF footprint of a
single physical access device. With Virtual AP technology,
WLAN users within the device’s footprint can associate with
what appears to be different Wi²s and their associated network
services. All the services are delivered using a single radio
channel, enabling Virtual AP technology to optimize the use of
limited WLAN radio spectrum.
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network: A group of devices on one or more
LANs that are configured with the same VLAN ID so that they
can communicate as if they were attached to the same wire,
when in fact they are located on a number of different LAN
segments. Used also to create separation between different
user groups.
256
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Glossary
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy: WEP is based on the use of security
keys and the popular RC4 encryption algorithm. Wireless
devices without a valid WEP key will be excluded from network
traffic.
WPA
WiFi Protected Access: WPA employs 802.1X as its basic
framework for user authentication and dynamic key
management to provide an enhanced security solution for
802.11 wireless networks.
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
257
Glossary
258
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS Wi² System Manual
Index
CTS
Numerics
802.11g
5-210
4-91, 5-218
device status, displaying
AES
4-109
authentication
4-53
cipher suite 4-112, 5-231
closed system 5-220
configuring 4-53
MAC address 4-54, 5-194, 5-195
type 4-98, 5-220
web redirect 4-55
5-149
DHCP 4-46, 5-205, 5-206
DNS 4-47, 5-204
Domain Name Server See DNS
downloading software
DTIM
4-90, 5-216
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP
EAP
4-108
encryption
event logs
beacon
interval
4-90, 5-216
rate 4-90, 5-216
BOOTP 5-205, 5-206
4-65, 5-181
4-98, 4-105, 4-108
4-120, 5-160
Extensible Authentication Protocol See EAP
factory defaults
restoring
Clear To Send See CTS
CLI
5-125
command modes
closed system
5-129
4-83, 5-220
command line interface See CLI
community name, configuring
4-75, 5-168
community string 4-76, 5-168
configuration settings, saving or restoring 4-68,
5-181
configuration, initial setup 3-33
console port
required settings
3-35
firmware
displaying version
4-67, 5-150
upgrading 4-65, 4-67, 5-181
fragmentation 5-217
gateway address
country code
configuring
4-68, 5-136
filter 4-57, 5-194
address 4-53, 5-194
local or remote 4-53, 5-196
management access 4-58, 5-198
protocol types 4-59, 5-199
VLANs 4-83, 5-242
3-36, 5-140
3-36, 4-47, 5-126, 5-205
Index
hardware version, displaying
HTTP, secure server
HTTPS
5-150
RADIUS
4-48, 4-108, 5-185
RADIUS, logon authentication
5-147
4-55, 5-185
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service See
5-146
RADIUS
Request to Send See RTS
IAPP
reset
4-68, 5-136
reset button 4-68
5-241
IEEE 802.11b
4-81
IEEE 802.11f 5-241
IEEE 802.11g 4-81
resetting the access point
restarting the system
configuring interface
4-81, 5-210
IEEE 802.1x 4-108, 5-191, 5-194
configuring 4-114, 5-191
initial setup 3-33
RJ-45 port
configuring duplex mode
configuring speed
configuring
5-205, 5-206
3-36, 4-45, 5-205, 5-206
5-206
5-206
RTS
threshold
IP address
BOOTP/DHCP
4-68, 5-136
4-68, 5-136
4-91, 5-218
Secure Socket Layer See SSL
security, options
messages
4-98, 4-99
session key 4-114
shared key 4-106, 5-232
server
Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP
log
4-71, 4-120, 5-157
4-70, 5-157
login
CLI
SNMP
5-125
4-55, 5-185
MAC address, authentication
4-54, 5-194, 5-195
open system
4-75, 5-168
community name
logon authentication
RADIUS client
Simple Network Time Protocol See SNTP
4-98, 5-220
4-75, 5-168
5-168
enabling traps 4-76, 5-170
trap destination 4-76, 5-170
trap manager 4-76, 5-170
SNTP 4-72, 5-162
enabling client 4-72, 5-163
server 4-72, 5-162
community string
software
displaying version
downloading
password
configuring
4-64, 4-67, 5-143
management 4-64, 4-67, 5-143
PSK 4-108
260
4-65, 4-116, 5-150
4-67, 5-181
SSH
server Status
4-52
4-104, 5-219
SSL 5-146
startup files, setting 5-181
station status 4-118, 5-224
SSID
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS VL Wi² System Manual
Index
status
displaying device status
5-149
displaying station status 4-118, 5-224
system clock, setting 4-72, 5-163
system log
enabling
server
4-70, 5-157
4-70, 5-157
upgrading software
4-65, 5-181
user name, manager 4-64, 5-142
user password 4-64, 5-142, 5-143
system software, downloading from server
4-65,
VLAN
configuration
5-181
native ID
Telnet
for managenet access
4-83, 5-242
4-83
5-125
WEP
4-104
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol See TKIP
configuring
time zone
shared key
TKIP
4-73, 5-164
4-108
transmit power, configuring
5-213
trap destination 4-76, 5-170
trap manager 4-76, 5-170
troubleshooting A-249
4-105
4-106, 5-232
Wi-Fi Multimedia See WMM
Wi-Fi Protected Access See WPA
Wired Equivalent Protection See WEP
WPA
4-108
pre-shared key
4-112, 5-235
WPA, pre-shared key See PSK
BreezeMAX Wi² and BreezeACCESS VL Wi² System Manual
261

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2007:02:13 10:47:23Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Modify Date                     : 2007:02:13 14:33:23+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:02:13 14:33:23+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : david
Title                           : WI2.book
Document ID                     : uuid:a9aa0102-e709-4f80-994b-672ced98cfad
Instance ID                     : uuid:ef8de3f9-4783-42e2-b146-2b9e1df73fa6
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 285
Author                          : david